FujiFilm PROFECT CS Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. FujiFilm Manuals
  4. Laboratory Equipment
  5. PROFECT CS
  6. Service manual

FujiFilm PROFECT CS Service Manual

Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual

GUIDE PAGE

GUIDE PAGE
PROFECT CS/ClearView CS/CSm
Checkpoints When Trouble Occurs
Search the error code.
The LCD panel does not transition to its default screen.
Connection is not established between RU and CL.
Distinguish between abnormal images.
Abnormal image occurs.
Gather log data.
Documents and References to be Used When Trouble Occurs
Software Control (relationship with CR Console)
Electrical Block Diagrams/Short-Circuit Detection
Circuit Diagrams (Disconnection check)
I/O Locations and Their Functional Overview
DRV17A/17B Board LEDs
Roller Locations/Conveyance Paths
Voltage check
Image Related Checkpoints
Sensitivity/Shading Correction
Parts Related Checkpoints
Parts List (INDEX)
Checkpoints during Installation
Installation Specifications
Installation Procedures (Software Setup)
Installing Optional Items
When Installed in Patient Environment
Registering the Master CL
Setting the Barcode Reader
Checkpoints during Preventive Maintenance
List of Preventive Maintenance Replacement Parts: 2-Year Intervals
Procedures
Software Related Checkpoints
Install/version update software and applications.
Gather log data.
Back up/restore machine shipment control data.
Back up/restore configuration data.
- 1 -
To Table of Contents of Service Manual
How to Use PDF Manual
3-Year Intervals

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the PROFECT CS and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for FujiFilm PROFECT CS

Summary of Contents for FujiFilm PROFECT CS

  • Page 1 To Table of Contents of Service Manual GUIDE PAGE GUIDE PAGE How to Use PDF Manual PROFECT CS/ClearView CS/CSm Checkpoints When Trouble Occurs Checkpoints during Installation Search the error code. Installation Specifications The LCD panel does not transition to its default screen.
  • Page 2 How to Use PDF Manual Hyperlinks A hyperlinks is inserted at the blue-colored mark in this manual. Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference chapter or section. -Example of Hyperlink- {MC:3.1_Covers} Clicking it allows you to jump to the reference section. - 2 -...
  • Page 3 BLANK PAGE - 3 -...
  • Page 4 BLANK PAGE - 4 -...
  • Page 5 PROFECT CS/ClearView CS/CSm CR-IR 363 Service Manual "PROFECT CS" is a trade name used in Asia, Europe, Oceania, Africa and Americas (except for the U.S.). "ClearView CS/CSm" is a trade name used in the U.S. The relationship between mR (milliroentgen), which is the unit of radiation, and μC/kg (micro-coulomb/kilogram),...
  • Page 6 BLANK PAGE...
  • Page 7 Used to indicate the matters that need attention during steps of the procedure. 4. The following conducts are prohibited without prior written approval of FUJIFILM Corporation: - Copy or transcribe a whole or part of the contents of this manual.
  • Page 8 Caution when Using the ST-BD Type IP  Notation of Symbols - Check/Adjustment indicator: Indicates that it is necessary to check or adjust the When using the ST-BD type IP, be sure to use the equipment which is installed with installation location when the part or component the software version V2.0 or later and on which the image adjustment is performed removed is to be reinstalled.
  • Page 9 Contents Safety Precautions CR-IR 363 Service Manual - Contents Safety Precaution Safety Precautions ..............1 General Precautions ................1 Precautions Against Laser Radiation ..........2 Precautions on Patient Environment ..........2 Labels ..................3 Laser Precaution Labels ..............3 2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations ..........3 2.1.2 List of CR-IR 363 Laser Precaution Labels ..........4 Other Labels ..................7...
  • Page 10 Contents Product Specifications Product Specifications Specifications of Machine ............1 Product Code ..................1 Available IP Sizes and Types ............1 List of Optional Items ...............2 Product Specifications ..............2 Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity ........2 Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine ........3 Environmental Conditions ...............3 Electrical Specifications ..............4 Installation Space and Servicing Space ..........4...
  • Page 11 Contents Machine Description (MD) Machine Description (MD) Machine Overview ............MD-1 Bootup Processing ..............MD-27 RU Shutdown Processing ............MD-29 Features ...................MD-1 1.2 System Configuration ...............MD-1 Descriptions of Electrical Operations ......MD-30 1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names ..MD-2 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection Function ....MD-30 Machine Components ..............MD-4 Erasure Unit Control ..............MD-39 1.4.1 Unit Locations ..................
  • Page 12 Contents Machine Description (MD) Nothing ................MD-70 4.1.4 Image Data Flow ................MD-50 4.1.5 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem ..........MD-51 Updated Contents of the Software Programs ..... MD-71 4.1.6 LED Indications of I/O Status ............. MD-52 Changes in Updates ...............MD-71 Descriptions of Mechanical Components and Their Operations ..............
  • Page 13 Contents Machine Description (MD) 7.10 Addition of the Log Function of Checking the Erasure Dose ..MD-85 7.10.1 OPER.LOG and Storage Folder............MD-85 7.10.2 Contents of OPER.LOG ..............MD-85 7.11 Countermeasure against Abnormal Indication on the ERROR DB ..............MD-86 7.11.1 Abnormal Indication on the ERROR DB Window....... MD-86 7.11.2 Countermeasure against Abnormal Indication on the ERROR DB ..
  • Page 14 Contents Troubleshooting (MT) Troubleshooting (MT) Overview of Troubleshooting ...........MT-1 4.10 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 10 ......MT-68 4.11 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 11 ......MT-69 Flow of Troubleshooting ............MT-2 4.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 12 ......MT-70 Analysis and Check Flow Marks ..........
  • Page 15 Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 4.34 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 34 ......MT-95 5.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 12 ........MT-117 4.35 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 35 ......MT-96 5.13 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 13 ........MT-118 4.36 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 36 ......MT-97 5.14 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 14 ........MT-119 4.37...
  • Page 16 0.10 Contents Troubleshooting (MT) Procedures for Checking the Voltage ......MT-135 DRV17A/B Board ..............MT-144 9.4.1 Check Flow ..................MT-144 Checking the Board Locations ..........MT-135 9.4.2 Procedures for Checking the DRV17A Board Fuses ......MT-145 Checking the Voltage on the CPU91A Board Test Pins (TP1)... MT-135 9.4.3 Procedures for Checking the DRV17B Board Fuses ......MT-145 8.2.1...
  • Page 17 0.11 Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 10.6 Sensor Check Flow 3 ............MT-158 10.15 Sensor Check Flow 12 ............MT-185 10.6.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (3) .........MT-159 10.15.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (12) .......MT-186 10.6.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (3) ......MT-160 10.15.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (12) ......MT-187 10.7 Sensor Check Flow 4 ............
  • Page 18 0.12 Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 14. Line Error between CL and RU ........MT-235 11.7 Checking the MZ1 Operation ..........MT-211 11.8 Checking the MZ2 Operation ..........MT-213 14.1 Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL and RU ....MT-235 11.9 Checking the MZ3 Operation ..........MT-214 14.2 Checking Connection from the CL ........
  • Page 19 0.13 Contents Troubleshooting (MT) 15.4 Countermeasure against Image Abnormalities Due 17.10 Motors (MB1 to MB3, MC1 to MC4, ME2, MZ4) ....MT-271 to Laser Light Blocked under a Low Temperature ....MT-254 17.11 Actuators (SOLA1 to SOLA4, PA1 to PA4, 15.5 Countermeasure against Image Abnormality SVA1 to SVA4, CLA1 to CLA4) ..........
  • Page 20 0.14 Contents Troubleshooting (MT) Appendix 1. Procedures for Restoring the Application by 20.5 Checking the Connector Connections ........MT-298 means of DIP SW-No.6 of 20.6 Checking the LCD Panel ............MT-298 the CPU91A Board ........Appx MT-1 20.7 Check of Cable Connection and Continuity ......MT-299 Procedures for Restoring the RU Application ....
  • Page 21 0.15 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) Check/Adjustment Procedures for Each Unit ....MC-1 4.15 Power Supply Unit (#50001 or Later) ........MC-29 Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment ........MC-1 4.16 PSU29A Board (#50001 or Later) ..........MC-30 Checking the Protective Grounding ..............
  • Page 22 0.16 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 5.20 Suction Sensors (SA5, 11, 17, 23) .........MC-51 5.44 Torsion Coil Springs ...............MC-78 5.44.1 Removal Procedures (Actuator: 366N0059A) ........MC-78 5.21 Suction Cup Assemblies ............MC-52 5.44.2 Removal Procedures (Actuator: 366N0072B) ........MC-80 5.22 Suction Cups ................MC-53 5.44.3...
  • Page 23 0.17 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 6.15 Pre-Convergence IP Sensor (SB6) ........MC-106 6.30 Rubber Rollers (M and N) ............MC-129 6.16 IP Transport Motor (MB1) .............MC-107 6.31 Rubber Rollers (O and P) .............MC-131 6.17 Convergence Unit IP Transport Motor (MB2) .......MC-108 6.32 Rubber Rollers (Q and R) .............MC-132 6.18...
  • Page 24 0.18 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) Post-Reading Conveyor Unit ........MC-189 7.13 Latch Assembly (Latch Driver) ..........MC-159 7.14 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) ........MC-160 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit ..........MC-189 7.15 Tensioner ................MC-161 8.1.1 Nothing ..................... MC-189 8.1.2 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit (For CR-IR 363) ......... MC-195 7.16 Planetary Gear Assembly .............MC-161 8.1.2.1...
  • Page 25 0.19 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) Erasure Conveyor Unit ..........MC-218 9.24 Reflection Plate ..............MC-243 9.25 Timing Belt (A) ..............MC-244 Erasure Conveyor Unit ............MC-218 9.25.1 Removal Procedures................ MC-244 Lamp Assembly ..............MC-221 9.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures ..............MC-245 Duct ..................MC-223 9.26 Timing Belt (B) ..............MC-247 Duct Assembly ..............MC-224...
  • Page 26 0.20 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 10. Scanning Optics Unit ........... MC-298 9.40 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F) ........MC-266 9.41 Rubber Rollers (G and H) .............MC-268 10.1 Nothing .................MC-298 9.42 Rubber Rollers (I and J) ............MC-269 10.2 Scanning Optics Unit ............MC-302 9.43...
  • Page 27 0.21 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 13. PC Boards ..............MC-365 12.11 Driving-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ2) and Driven-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ3) ....MC-338 13.1 Board Bracket Assembly ............MC-365 12.12 IP Stopper HP Sensor (SZ5) ..........MC-339 13.2 CPU91A Board ..............MC-367 12.13 Grip Drive Motor (MZ2) ............MC-340...
  • Page 28 0.22 Contents Checks, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts (MC) 16. Format Adjustment ............MC-406 20. Image/Conveyance Checks ......... MC-429 16.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment ..........MC-406 20.1 Check Before Procedures ............MC-429 16.1.1 Main Scan Position (Pixel) Adjustment ..........MC-406 20.2 Image/Conveyance Checks ..........MC-430 16.1.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment..........
  • Page 29 0.23 Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) Maintenance Utility (MU) Overview of RU Service Utility ........MU-1 RU PC-TOOL ..............MU-19 Tree of RU Service Utility ............MU-1 Functions of RU PC-TOOL .............MU-19 4.1.1 RU PC-TOOL Main Screen and Tree ..........MU-19 User Utility ................ MU-2 4.1.2 “Maintenance is in progress”...
  • Page 30 0.24 Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) 4.4 Configuration ................MU-48 [3-5-1] Main CPU IPL Ver. Up ................ MU-63 [3-5-2] Sub CPU IPL Ver. Up ................. MU-63 4.4.1 FTP SERV ..................MU-48 [3-5-3] Sub CPU APPL Ver. Up ..............MU-63 4.4.2 CDPath ....................MU-48 Virtual Image Check ................
  • Page 31 0.25 Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) [5-6-7] HV ON/OFF ..................MU-83 [6-5] Sub Scanning 1 ................MU-106 Mechanical 1 Check ................MU-84 [6-5-1] Sub-Scanning Grip HP (MZ2) ............MU-106 [6-1] IP Removal Unit ................. MU-84 [6-5-2] Sub-Scanning Grip Diagnostic Step Operation (MZ2) ..... MU-107 [6-1-1] Suction Cup Arm HP ................
  • Page 32 0.26 Contents Maintenance Utility (MU) [7-3] Erasure Conveyor 2 ................. MU-127 [7-3-1] Path Change Guide (SOLF1) ............MU-127 [7-3-2] FANE2 (INV) ..................MU-128 [7-3-3] FANE3 (LAMP) ................. MU-129 [7-3-4] Erasure Conveyor (ME1) ..............MU-130 [7-3-5] LAMP (LAMP1-5) ................MU-130 [7-3-6] Erasure Unit Thermal Sensor Display ..........
  • Page 33 0.27 Contents Service Parts List（SP） Service Parts List (SP) How to Use Service Parts List ...............SP-1 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 5 ...........SP-25 INDEX ....................SP-2 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 6 ...........SP-26 COVER 1 (#20001 or Later) ............SP-3 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 7 ...........SP-27 COVER 2 (#20001 or Later) ............SP-4 FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 8 ...........SP-28 COVER 3 (#50001 or Later) ............SP-5 SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 ........SP-29...
  • Page 34 0.28 Contents Service Parts List（SP） ERASURE CONVEYOR 9 (#20001 or Later) ......SP-48 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 3 (#60001 or Later) ......SP-106 ERASURE CONVEYOR 10 (#50001 or Later) ......SP-49 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE ..........SP-124 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 1 ...........SP-50 TABLE OF SCREWS / WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS ..SP-129 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 2 (#60001 or Later) ......SP-51 LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS ........SP-129 LIGHT-COLLECTING UNIT 1..........SP-52...
  • Page 35 0.29 Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) Preventive Maintenance (PM) Preventive Maintenance Program ........PM-1 Turning OFF the High-Voltage Switch ......PM-16 How To Use the Preventive Maintenance Volume ....PM-1 Cassette Set Unit ............PM-17 Notations of Intervals ..............PM-1 Removing the Feed/Load Conveyor Unit ....... PM-17 Preventive Maintenance Program List ........
  • Page 36 0.30 Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 13. Erasure Conveyor Unit ..........PM-80 Reinstalling the Cleaning Guide Assembly and Guide ... PM-42 13.1 Removing the Lamp Assembly ..........PM-80 10. Post-Reading Conveyor Unit ........PM-43 13.2 Removing the Erasure Conveyor Unit ........PM-81 10.1 Removing the Retaining Member ...........
  • Page 37 0.31 Contents Preventive Maintenance (PM) 18. Cleaning/Replacing the Air Filter (#20001 or later) ... PM-120 19. Securing the Machine ..........PM-121 19.1 Connecting the Cables ............PM-121 19.2 Securing the Machine ............PM-122 19.3 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding ....... PM-122 20.
  • Page 38 0.32 Contents Installation (IN) Installation (IN) 1. Specifications of Machine ..........IN-1 Final Placement ..............IN-28 Securing the Cable ..............IN-28 2. Installation Work Flowchart ..........IN-2 Securing the Machine ...............IN-28 3. Preparation for Installation ..........IN-3 CL Installation Procedures ..........IN-29 Precautions Regarding Installation ..........IN-3 8. Installing the RU Software ..........IN-29 3.1.1 Installation Site Requirements ...............
  • Page 39 0.33 Contents Installation (IN) Appendix 1. Additional Protective Grounding ......Appx IN-1 Appendix 2. Setting the Master CL ....... Appx IN-2 Additionally Registering the Master CL (Procedures on the CL1) ...........Appx IN-2 Registering the RU (Procedures on the CL2) ....Appx IN-4 Registering the Machine Information (CONNECTING EQUIPMENT) .........Appx IN-5 Saving Configuration and Exiting Service Utility ....Appx IN-6 Verifying Switching of Master CL ........Appx IN-7...
  • Page 40 0.34 Contents Performance Check (PC) Performance Check (PC) CR-IR 363 Performance Check List ........PC-1 Installation Information ................PC-1 Checklist ....................PC-1 0.34 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-04 11.15.2004 FM4425...
  • Page 41 Control Sheet Revision Pages affected Issue date Reason number 08.25.2003 New release (FM4098) All pages 11.15.2004 Corrections (FM4425) 05.09.2005 Corrections (FM4610) 4–17 10.02.2006 Change of Corporate Name and Corporate Logo (FM4977) 5, 8, 14 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 09.30.2008 Revision (FM5340) 4–19 09.30.2009 Revision (FM5540)
  • Page 42 Safety Precaution- Safety Precautions  Optical Parts  When servicing the optical parts with the protective housings removed, be sure to turn OFF the power switch. Warnings and cautions regarding the procedures should be observed to avoid possible physical hazards and serious accidents that may occur during installation and ...
  • Page 43 Safety Precaution- Precautions Against Laser Radiation Precautions on Patient Environment As indicated in the Certification and Indication Label attached on the lower left-hand Before the machine is installed, the supervisor at the machine installation site (the side cover of the machine, the machine complies with “Laser Products - Conformance hospital’s director) should check to see whether the machine is installed in the patient with IEC 60825-1, Am.
  • Page 44 Safety Precaution- Labels Laser Precaution Labels 2.1.1 Laser Precaution Label Attachment Locations Below are illustrated the protective housings and attachment locations of laser precaution labels, as specified in "Laser Products - Conformance with IEC 60825-1, Am. 2 and IEC 60601-2-22; Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No. 50) and IEC 60825-1 (Amendment 2).”...
  • Page 45 Safety Precaution- 2.1.2 List of CR-IR 363 Laser Precaution Labels  IEC60825-1 Class 3B Panel Label REFERENCE The laser caution label attached to the machine differs depending on its serial number. Shown below are the laser caution labels to be attached to the machines with the serial numbers of 21390 or earlier.
  • Page 46 Safety Precaution-  IEC60825-1 Class 3B Panel Label REFERENCE The laser caution label attached to the machine differs depending on its serial number. Shown below are the laser caution labels to be attached to the machines with the serial numbers of 21391 to 24336. ...
  • Page 47 Safety Precaution-  IEC60825-1 Class 3B Panel Label REFERENCE The laser caution label attached to the machine differs depending on its serial number. Shown below are the laser caution labels to be attached to the machines with the serial numbers of 24337 or later and 50001 or later. ...
  • Page 48 Safety Precaution- Other Labels 2.2.1 Attachment Locations for Ratings Indication Label and Other Labels REFERENCES - The type of label is different depending on destinations and machine serial numbers. - There are some equipment on which manufacturer labels are not attached, depending on the serial numbers.
  • Page 49 Safety Precaution-  Ratings Indication Labels of CR-IR 363 (Machines with Serial  Ratings Indication Labels of CR-IR 363 (Machines with Serial Numbers 21390 or Those Earlier than 21390) Numbers 21391 to 23899)  For use in Japan  For use in Japan ...
  • Page 50 Safety Precaution-  Ratings Indication Labels of CR-IR 363 (Machines with Serial  Ratings Indication Labels of CR-IR 363 (Machines with Serial Numbers 23900 or Those Later than 23900) Numbers 50001 or Those Later than 50001)  For use in Japan ...
  • Page 51 Safety Precaution- 2.2.2 Handling Instruction Labels and Attachment  Feed/Load Conveyor Unit Locations  Cassette Set Unit  Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit Safety Precaution- CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 52 Safety Precaution-  Post-reading conveyor unit  Erasure Conveyor Unit  Light-Collecting Guide (Front) Safety Precaution- CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 53 Safety Precaution-  Light-Collecting Guide (Back) Safety Precaution- CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 54 Safety Precaution-  Cassette Insertion Operation Labels  Covers NOTE Always use a cable conforming to the specification at a position with a caution label applied. Safety Precaution- CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-09E 10.24.2011 FM5964...
  • Page 55 Safety Precaution- Protective Housings Against Laser CLASSIFICATION Exposure 1. According to the type of protection against electrical shock Even when the protective housings are removed for servicing, laser beams will never leak out from the machine unless the optical path is intentionally changed. However, if CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT the optical path is changed inadvertently during optics-related procedures, the service 2.
  • Page 56 5.1.1 Further Information for IEC60601-1-2 Model name PROFECT CS/ClearView CS is referred to as CR-IR 363 in this section. - Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as follows.
  • Page 57 Safety Precaution- Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration - electromagnetic immunity The CR-IR 363 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The The CR-IR 363 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the CR-IR 363 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
  • Page 58 Safety Precaution-  For European Users: Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the CR-IR 363 Correspondence between applicable EMC standards and serial numbers of the The CR-IR 363 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which machine radiated RF disturbances are controlled.
  • Page 59 Safety Precaution- CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950-1 for data processing equipment and IEC60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations shall comply with the system standard IEC60601-1-1:2000 and IEC60601-1:2005 Chapter 16.
  • Page 60 Safety Precaution- Cautions on Network - Before connecting this system to the network with other systems, confirm that the other systems are not affected. If they are affected, take countermeasures such as network separation. - After modifying the network, confirm that this system is not affected. If it is affected, take appropriate countermeasures including: - Replacing connected devices - Connecting additional devices...
  • Page 61 Control Sheet Revision Pages affected Issue date Reason number 08.25.2003 New release (FM4098) All pages 02.20.2004 Corrections (FM4181) 05.09.2005 Corrections (FM4610) All pages 09.30.2008 Blank pages added (FM5340) 6, 7 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 09.30.2009 Revision (FM5540) 1, 3, 4 10.24.2011 Revision (FM5964) 2, 4...
  • Page 62 Image reader machine main body #20001 or Later HR-BD (high resolution type): 24x30cmHR (dual side), CR-IR 363 18x24cmHR (dual side) FCR PROFECT CS (For China) Metric settings ST-VI/ST-VN (standard type): 35x43cm, 35x35cm, CR IR 363 RU ED2 CN E Image reader machine main body...
  • Page 63 Product Specifications List of Optional Items Dimensions, Weight, and Center of Gravity Product code Item Qty. Remarks  Dimensions - For retaining the W655×D740×H1480 (mm) IR 362 FLOOR FIX KIT #(E) Anti-topple retainer kit machine - #20001 or Later Anti-topple retainer kit - For retaining the IR 362 FLOOR FIX KIT * #(E) Minor change machine...
  • Page 64 Product Specifications Means for Moving and Fixing the Machine Environmental Conditions  Moving Means  Climate Conditions Double-wheel caster (variable-direction/no-brake) x4  Operating  Fixing Means Temperature: 15 to 30°C Relative humidity: 40 to 80% RH - Adjustable foot x4, or retaining member x2 Atmospheric pressure: 750 to 1060 hPa Heat generation: 350 W approx.
  • Page 65 Product Specifications 1.8 Electrical Specifications Installation Space and Servicing Space  Frequency  Installation Space Single-phase, 50-60Hz, ±3%  Input Voltage Single-phase, 120-240V~(AC)±10%  Capacity 0.77 kVA  Rated Amperage Single-phase, 120-240V~(AC)±10%, 50-60Hz : 7A-2.9A  Power Consumption Maximum: 770 W ...
  • Page 66 Product Specifications 1.10 Disposal 1.10.1 Disposal of Machine When the machine is to be disposed of, the IMG17A/B board, which contains a bat- tery, should be removed from the machine before its disposal. Be sure to return the removed IMG17A/B board to the Parts Center. 1.10.2 Disposal of IP Regarding the IP disposal, follow the instructions to dispose as laws are provided in...
  • Page 67 Product Specifications BLANK PAGE CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 68 Product Specifications BLANK PAGE CR-IR 363 Service Manual Product Specifications 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 69 Control Sheet Revision Pages affected Issue date Reason number 08.25.2003 New release (FM4098) All pages 02.20.2004 Correction (FM4181) 05.09.2005 Corrections (FM4610) 36, 57 09.30.2008 Revision (FM5340) 42, 57-75 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 09.30.2009 Revision (FM5540) 2, 13-83 10.24.2011 Revision (FM5964) 06.29.2012 Revision (FM6046) 17-87...
  • Page 70 MD-1 Machine Overview 1.2 System Configuration This device uses a compliant network with IEEE802.3 and adopts FRUP as a data communication protocol. Features Basic system configuration examples are described here. u NOTE u  Features of the Machine If the network is shut down due to a network device failure or any other cause, this device is no longer able to transfer image data.
  • Page 71 MD-2 1.3 Overall Machine Configuration and Component Names  External View of Machine MD-2 011-202-08E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 72 MD-3  Nomenclature and Functions  Operation Panel Name Function Operation panel Operation panel for the RU main body. POWER lamp It is lit (in green) when the circuit breaker is pushed in the "I" position and power is turned ON. Since the circuit breaker remains in the ON state, the POWER lamp is always lit.
  • Page 73 MD-4 Machine Components 1.4.1 Unit Locations MD-4 011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 08.25.2003 FM4098...
  • Page 74 MD-5 1.4.2 Roller Locations and Conveyance Paths MD-5 011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 08.25.2003 FM4098...
  • Page 75 MD-6 1.4.3 I/O Locations and Functional Descriptions A list of sensor and barcode reader names and functions is presented below.  Cassette set unit  I/O Locations: Cassette Set Unit and Feed/Load Conveyor Unit Symbol Name Type Function Locations of the sensors and barcode reader are illustrated below. SA1, 7, 13, 19 Cassette ejection PI (5mm)
  • Page 76 MD-7  I/O Locations: Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit, Subscanning A list of sensor and barcode reader names and functions is presented below. Unit, and Post-Reading Conveyor Unit  Side-positioning conveyor unit Locations of the sensors and barcode reader are illustrated below. Symbol Name Type...
  • Page 77 MD-8  I/O Locations: Erasure Conveyor Unit and Housing A list of sensor and thermistor names and function is presented below.  Erasure conveyor unit Locations of the sensors and thermistor are illustrated below. Symbol Name Type Function Post-reading conveyance PI (19mm) Detects that an IP being standby IP sensor...
  • Page 78 MD-9  I/O Locations: Cassette Set Unit and Feed/Load Conveyor Unit A list of motor, clutch, solenoid, pump, and solenoid valve names and functions is presented below. Locations of the motors, clutches, solenoids, pumps, and solenoid valves are illustrated below. ...
  • Page 79 MD-10  I/O Locations: Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit, Subscanning A list of motor names and functions is presented below. Unit, and Post-Reading Conveyor Unit  Side-positioning conveyor unit Locations of the motors are illustrated below. Symbol Name Type Function Side-positioning motor Pulse motor Drives the side-positioning mechanism...
  • Page 80 MD-11  I/O Locations: Erasure Conveyor Unit and Housing A list of motor, solenoid, and fan names and functions is presented below.  Erasure conveyor unit Locations of the motors, solenoids, and fans are illustrated below. Symbol Name Type Function IP transport motor Pulse motor Transports an IP.
  • Page 81 MD-12 1.4.4 Board Locations MD-12 011-202-01 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 08.25.2003 FM4098...
  • Page 82 MD-13 1.5 System Block Diagram  Power Supply System (#20001 or Later) Power supply unit +5V(A) +5V(S) +15V(D) +15V(F) -15V(H) PSU17A +12V(K) +24V(B) +5V(C) +24V(E) +24V(B) +15V(G) +24V(J) CN25 Driver board Driver board Inverter board DRV17A DRV17B INV17A +24V(B) +24V(B) M(DC) LAMP1, 2, 3 CN20 Sensor board Sensor board...
  • Page 83 MD-14  Signal System (#20001 or Later) Power supply unit PSU17A +24V (B) Driver board Driver board DRV17A Driver DRV17B Inverter board Driver circuit INV17A circuit Inverter CN1 CN2 CN21 CN22 circuit M (DC) LAMP1, 2, 3 Sensor board CN5 CN6 CN7 CN8 Sensor board Inverter board SNS17B...
  • Page 84 MD-15  Power Supply System (#50001 or Later) Power supply board +5V(S) +15V(D) +15V(F) -15V(H) (A-3) PSU29A +24V +24V +24V (A-2) (B-2) (A-1) (B-3) +15V(G) Driver board CN25 Driver board DRV17A DRV17B Erasure board +24V(B-2) +24V(B-2) ERS23A M(DC) M(DC) M(DC) Inverter board Inverter board INV26A...
  • Page 85 MD-16  Signal System (#50001 or Later) Power supply board PSU29A Driver board Driver board Driver Driver DRV17A DRV17B circuit circuit Erasure board ERS23A CN21 CN22 CN81 M(DC) M(DC) M(DC) Inverter board Inverter board INV26A INV26A THB1 LAMPB4, 6 LAMPB3, 5 Sensor board CN5 CN6 CN7 CN8 Sensor board...
  • Page 86 MD-17  Power Supply System (#60001 or Later) Power supply board +5V(S) +15V(D) +24V(B-1) -15V(H) (A-3) PSU29A +24V +24V +24V (A-2) (B-2) (A-1) (B-3) +15V(G) Driver board CN25 Driver board DRV17A DRV17B Erasure board +24V(B-2) +24V(B-2) ERS23A M(DC) M(DC) M(DC) Inverter board Inverter board INV26A...
  • Page 87 MD-18  Signal System (#60001 or Later) Power supply board PSU29A Driver board Driver board Driver Driver DRV17A DRV17B circuit circuit Erasure board ERS23A CN21 CN22 CN81 M(DC) M(DC) M(DC) Inverter board Inverter board INV26A INV26A THB1 LAMPB4, 6 LAMPB3, 5 Sensor board CN5 CN6 CN7 CN8 Sensor board...
  • Page 88 MD-19 2. Descriptions of Software Control 2.2 Data Flow between RU and CL The exchange of data between the RU and CL is described below. u NOTE u 2.2.1 Data Flow during Routine Processing In this chapter, the "RU Application," "RU IP Address," and "RU Configuration" are referred to shortly as RU-AP, RU IP ADDR, and CONFIGURATION, respectively.  Flow of image data The image data read from the IP is stored in the SDRAM of the image processing 2.1 Network Settings...
  • Page 89 MD-20 2.2.2 "Install Operation" and Data Flow (4) Set "CONFIGURATION". → It is written into the FTP server. (1) In the Machine Maintenance mode (LCD panel), set "RU IP ADDR" and "FTP IP ADDR". → They are written into the FLASH ROM located on the IMG17A/B board. (2) In the RU PC-TOOL (CL), start "INSTALL".
  • Page 90 MD-21 (5) Set "IP ADDR" of the CL.  Data Flow Block Diagram → RU-AP is written from the CD-ROM to the FTP server and to the SDRAM located on the CPU91A board. CONFIGURATION and CL IP ADDR are written from the FTP server to the SDRAM. →...
  • Page 91 MD-22 2.2.3 "VERSION UP" Operation and Data Flow (2) Set "IP ADDR" of the CL. → RU-AP is written from the CD-ROM to the FTP server and to the SDRAM  Overview of Version Update located on the CPU91A board. → RU-AP, CONFIGURATION, and CL IP ADDR are written from the SDRAM - A version update for the RU-AP is performed from the CL via the FTP server by use located on the CPU91A board to the FLASH ROM.
  • Page 92 MD-23 2.2.4 Flow of BACKUP Data 2.2.5 Data Flow during Restore The following data are copied to a floppy diskette (FD) by use of "BACKUP" of the RU The following data are restored from the FD to the FLASH ROM of the RU by use of PC-TOOL. "RESTORE" of the PC-TOOL. - Configuration data (CONFIGURATION) - Configuration data (CONFIGURATION) - Scanner data (SCN ALL DATA) - Scanner data (SCN ALL DATA) - Log data (ERROR LOG, TRACE LOG, HISTORY LOG) - Log data (HISTORY alone)  Data flow...
  • Page 93 MD-24 2.3 Master CL Switching Function  Example of Master CL Switching Scenario where the system is operated with RU-A set in master CL-A and RU-B/C set Once several master CL's are registered in the RU PC-TOOL, the User Utility allows in master CL-B, but is switched to a system with RU-A/B/C under control of CL-B. the user to selectively switch the master CL;...
  • Page 94 MD-25 2.4 Error Handling 2.5 SLEEP Mode The RU resumes its operation by attempting a retry(s), except under condition where The "SLEEP mode" is such that in order to conserve power, the state within the it is inoperable. machine automatically transitions to the power-saving mode when the RU is not operated within a specified period of time. 2.4.1 Error Handling 2.5.1 Operation in SLEEP Mode When an I/O error (mechanical, scanner, etc.) occurs between cassette insertion and IP reading, the IP is returned to the cassette.
  • Page 95 MD-26 2.5.2 Transition to the SLEEP Mode 2.5.3 Recovery from SLEEP Mode  Transition Requirements  Recover Requirements (1) If "SLEEP Mode ON" is set in the User Utility and the RU is not (1) When the LCD panel is touched. operated within the preset "SLEEP mode transition time" while the (2) When the cassette is loaded.
  • Page 96 MD-27 2.6 Bootup Processing (2) Load RU-IPL, RU-AP, etc. from the FLASH ROM to the SDRAM. After power is turned ON, diagnostic processing is performed in order of steps (1) through (7). (1) Check the connection with the FTP server. REFERENCE If the connection with the FTP server is abnormal, a connection retry takes about 3 minutes;...
  • Page 97 MD-28 (3) Perform diagnostics on each board. (6) Perform "Mechanical Initialization 2". (Subscanning unit grip correction) Boards to be diagnosed: SNS17A board, SNS17B board, DRV17A board, DRV17B board, (7) Perform "Scanner Initialization". SCN17A/SCT17B board, IMG17A/B board → When the scanner diagnostics are completed normally, the "Main CPU LED" →...
  • Page 98 MD-29 2.7 RU Shutdown Processing Mechanical shutdown processing and saving of log data are referred to as "RU shutdown processing." u NOTE u If the power is turned OFF without performing RU shutdown processing, log data will not be saved.  Flow of RU Shutdown Processing (1) "Shutdown processing"...
  • Page 99 MD-30 3. Descriptions of Electrical Power Fuse-Equipped Fuse Blown-Fuse Target for Protection Supply Component Detection Circuit Operations B141 Solenoid valve : SVA1/SVA2/SVA3/SVA4 DRV17A board B151 Clutch: CLA1/CLA2/CLA3/CLA4 3.1 Power Supply Voltage Output Detection B161 Pulse motor: MC1 Function B171 Pulse motor: MC2 To facilitate early recovery from a failure, the RU incorporates the power supply B181 Pulse motor: MC3 voltage output detection function, which offers the following features:...
  • Page 100 MD-31  Fuses and Detection Points (Machines with Serial Numbers Power Fuse-Equipped Fuse Blown-Fuse Target for Protection Supply Component Detection Circuit 50001 or Those Later than 50001) B161 Pulse motor: MC1 Power Fuse-Equipped Fuse Blown-Fuse B171 Pulse motor: MC2 Target for Protection Supply Component Detection Circuit...
  • Page 101 MD-32  Fuses and Detection Points (Machines with Serial Numbers Power Fuse-Equipped Fuse Blown-Fuse Target for Protection Supply Component Detection Circuit 60001 or Those Later than 60001) B161 Pulse motor: MC1 Power Fuse-Equipped Fuse Blown-Fuse B171 Pulse motor: MC2 Target for Protection Supply Component Detection Circuit...
  • Page 102 MD-33  Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram (Machines with Serial Numbers 20001 or Those Later than 20001) MD-33 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 103 MD-34 MD-34 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 104 MD-35  Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram (Machines with Serial Numbers 50001 or Those Later than 50001) MD-35 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 105 MD-36 MD-36 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 106 MD-37  Overcurrent Protection Circuit Block Diagram (Machines with Serial Numbers 60001 or Those Later than 60001) Power supply board PSU29A Driver board DRV17B (A-1) B161 Pulse motor: MC1 SLOT1 (A-2) B171 Pulse motor: MC2 B181 Pulse motor: MC3 (A-3) B191 Pulse motor: MC4 +24V...
  • Page 107 MD-38 Power supply board PSU29A Sensors board (A-1) SNS17D : Blown-Fuse SLOT1 Erasure board Detection Circuit Sensors board (A-2) ERS23A SNS17E : DC-DC converter Inverter board : INV26A (15V → +5VAS) 1.6A (A-3) Inverter board : INV26A 1.6A Sensors +24V Inverter board : INV26A +24V(E) 1.6A...
  • Page 108 MD-39 Erasure Unit Control 3.2.2 Components of the Erasure Unit Control (#20001 or later) - The control circuit for the erasure lamp unit is located on the SNS17B board. A control signal from the SNS17B board causes the relay circuit and lamp inverter 3.2.1 Overview of the Erasure Unit Control circuit of the driver board (INV17A/B) to operate, thereby turning ON or OFF the (#20001 or later) lamps and fans.
  • Page 109 MD-40 3.2.3 Overview of the Erasure Unit Control  Control regarding service life of the lamp (#50001 or later) - When the illumination count of the erasure lamp approaches the assumed machine working hours, a warning “It’s about time to replace” is issued.  Temperature adjustment control - When the illumination count of the erasure lamp reaches the assumed machine working hours, a warning “The fluorescent lamp reaches the end of life. Contact the Temperature adjustment control is exercised to keep the inside of the erasure unit at a service for replacement” is issued.
  • Page 110 MD-41 3.2.4 Components of the Erasure Unit Control (#50001 or later) The control circuit for the erasure lamp unit is located on the ERS23A board. A control signal from the ERS23A board causes lamp inverter circuit to operate, thereby turning ON or OFF the lamps. SNS17C Erasure board Power supply ERS23A board...
  • Page 111 MD-42 3.2.5 Erasure Lamp and Board Configurations (#50001 or later) This section illustrates the erasure lamps and boards that are mounted in the erasure unit. The mounting position of the INV board and the locations of the erasure lamps controlled by the INV board are as indicated below. MD-42 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual...
  • Page 112 MD-43 3.3 LEDs on the SNS17B Board I/O No. Load name Significance when LED is illuminated Cassette ejection sensor (first shelf) The shutter is opened, with the sensor in CLOSE state. By checking the illumination state of the LEDs on the SNS17B board, the status of each sensor can be verified. Furthermore, by checking the illumination state of the Cassette IN sensor (first shelf) The cassette is inserted, with the sensor in CLOSE state. LEDs, the status of the FFM and lamp, among others, can also be verified.
  • Page 113 MD-44 I/O No. Load name Significance when LED is illuminated Grip release HP sensor The grip mechanism is in its home position, with the sensor in CLOSE state. Post-reading conveyance IP sensor An IP is found in the post-reading conveyor unit, with the sensor in CLOSE state. Post-reading standby IP sensor An IP is found in the post-reading conveyance standby unit, with the sensor in CLOSE state.
  • Page 114 MD-45 3.3.3 Correspondence between LEDs and Erasure Control I/O No. Load name Significance when LED is illuminated Signals and FFM Control Signals FFM OK Drive signal to the FFM The FFM is driven. The LEDs, excluding the 7-segment LEDs, on the SNS17B board correspond as LON1 Status of the control signal sent to the The LAMP1 lamp outputs the ON control signal. listed in the table below. LAMP1 lamp LON2 Status of the control signal sent to the...
  • Page 115 MD-46 3.4 LEDs on the DRV17A/DRV17B Boards I/O No. Load name Significance when LED is illuminated SOLA1 Cassette hold solenoid (first shelf) Solenoid ON: The hold pin is in the released state. By checking the LEDs on the DRV17A and DRV17B boards, the status of solenoid and motor operations can be verified. SOLA2 Cassette hold solenoid (second shelf) Solenoid ON: The hold pin is in the released state.
  • Page 116 MD-47 3.4.2 Meaning of LED ON (Illuminated) An LED segment ON (illuminated) means that its corresponding load is being driven. Note, however, that the signal for detecting whether it is being driven differs depending on each load. Signals marked by a circle are detected. I/O No.
  • Page 117 MD-48 4. Descriptions of Scanner  IP Moved to the Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit Mechanism and Its Operation m Polygon (POL); Polygon diagnostics {MD:4.1.5_Error Detection/Processing Subsystem} u NOTES u m Housing conveyance sensors (SB5 and SG2); IP size measurement - "SCTxxx" is equivalent to SCT17B or SCT17P. - "PMTxxx"...
  • Page 118 MD-49 4.1.2 Respective Correction Data Scanning optics unit SCTxxx board (1) The shading correction data, sensitivity data, format data and speed correction data are stored in the FLASH memory on the image Start- processing board (IMG17B), copied onto the SDRAM when the power point of the machine is turned on, and further defined on the scanner board detector...
  • Page 119 MD-50 4.1.4 Image Data Flow [Photomultiplier] PMTxxx The flow of image data is described below. Numerals (1), (2), and so forth at the beginning of the items correspond to (1), (2), LOG amp and so forth in the image data flow illustration. Scanning optics unit It should be noted that the image data is sent to the CL nearly concurrently with reading.
  • Page 120 MD-51 4.1.5 Error Detection/Processing Subsystem (1) Error code The scanner-related error codes, which are created by a combination of the control signal of each I/O and the reference signal of the board, are configured to facilitate identification of their causes. (2) Scanner unit self-diagnostics The following diagnostics are performed in accordance with the device type determined by the DIP switches located on the CPU91A board. The sequence is as follows.
  • Page 121 MD-52 4.1.6 LED Indications of I/O Status Significance illuminated/ illuminated By observing the LEDs located on the scanner board (SCTxxx), the status of each I/O blinking of the scanner unit can be checked. High-voltage switch status signal HVON When SW setting is ON OFF: When SW setting is OFF SCTxxx Detection signal from the leading-edge Detected Not detected sensor (SED) IMG17B Detection signal from the start-point...
  • Page 122 MD-53 5. Descriptions of Mechanical  Half-Clutch The half-clutch that conveys the driving force only in one direction is used. This Components and Their Operations permits a single motor to provide driving forces for several mechanisms. 5.1 Features of Components Used for Each Unit  Electrically-Conductive Bearing Because an electrically-conductive housing and bearing are employed, static electricity charged from the IP to the roller is removed.
  • Page 123 MD-54  Guides  Snap-Fit Pinion Gears The IP that is being conveyed is protected by use of guides and shock absorbers. The employed pinion gears can be installed and removed without using retaining members or tools. Guides Servicing precautions u NOTE u Shock absorbers Never use ethanol or a moistened cloth.
  • Page 124 MD-55  Engraved Marks on the Side Plate  Lengths of Grip Springs Gear attachment orientations, sensor numbers, and other marks are directly engraved With conventional machines, grip springs with different strengths are employed on in the side plate of the unit to enhance ease of servicing. the reference side and opposite reference side in order to prevent obliquing of the IP.
  • Page 125 MD-56 5.2 IP Conveyance Flow [1] Feed the IP. {MD:5.3_Cassette Set Unit} [2] Convey the IP to the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MD:5.4_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} [3] Side-position the IP. {MD:5.5_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} [4] Read the image. {MD:5.6_Subscanning Unit} [5] Convey the IP from the subscanning unit to the {MD:5.7_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} erasure conveyor unit.
  • Page 126 MD-57 Cassette Set Unit MD-57 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 127 MD-58 5.3.1 Operation during IP Feed and Load  Continued from the previous page A flow of cassette set unit operation is illustrated below. The cassette set unit is Name Symbol Function Detail either in the feed state where the cassette is set ([A] in illustration below) and in the load state where the IP, after being read, is returned to the cassette ([B] in illustration Detects that the cassette is [1] Cassette ejection sensor SA1, 7, 13, 19...
  • Page 128 MD-59  Operation during Feed  Operation during Load MD-59 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 129 MD-60 5.3.2 How to Detect the IP Size  Inch/Metric Movable Guide Assembly Inch and metric cassettes are identified by the movable guide (identification guide). The CR-IR 363 recognizes the IP sizes by use of the following three types of The mechanism of identification is illustrated below. mechanisms.  Inch metric movable guide assembly: SA6 (SA12, SA18, SA24) It distinguishes between the inch cassette and metric cassette, and recognizes the IPs of inch size and metric size.
  • Page 130 MD-61 5.4 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit MD-61 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 131 MD-62 5.4.1 Path Changeover Guide/Convergence Path  Continued from the previous page Changeover Guide Name Symbol Function Detail The feed/load conveyor unit employs two types of changeover guides, i.e., path Detects whether the IP is IP feed/load sensor SB1, 2, 3, 4 changeover guide and convergence path changeover guide, to change the present or not.
  • Page 132 MD-63  Operation of Path Changeover Guide  Convergence Path Changeover Guide The path changeover guides effect a changeover for the second, third, and fourth The convergence path changeover guide effects a changeover for the conveyance shelves of the cassette inserting entrances (the first guide always remains open). The path of the IP that is conveyed to the side-positioning conveyor unit and the IP that is path changeover guide opens the IP conveyance path by its associated cam, and the returned from the erasure conveyor unit.
  • Page 133 MD-64 5.4.2 Brush Rollers The brush rollers clean (remove dust from) the IP. The operation of the brush rollers differ depending on whether the IP is passed or not. IP passed or not Motor driving Condition of brush rollers The half-clutch stops the brush rollers. Passed Normal direction As they are stopped, the dust is removed from the...
  • Page 134 MD-65 5.5 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit 5.5.2 Cleaning Guides They clean the both-side IP (mammography). 5.5.1 Side-Positioning Mechanism As the IP starts to pass, the two guides clean it by sandwiching it between them. It performs side-positioning operation prior to IP reading. It prevents reading error due to obliquing of the IP.
  • Page 135 MD-66 5.6 Subscanning Unit 5.6.2 Dust Removal Mechanism It remove dust deposited on the upper light-collecting guide and light-collecting mirror. 5.6.1 IP Stopper Mechanism Dust removal operation may be initiated by the user. The IP stopper mechanism stops the IP during side-positioning operation performed at the side-positioning conveyor unit. MD-66 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual...
  • Page 136 MD-67 5.6.3 Reading Mode 5.6.4 Center Guide and Grip Rollers The subscanning unit has five reading modes. Because the reading speed (IP The center guide and grip rollers of the subscanning unit are subjected to positional conveyance speed) varies with each of the reading modes, the grip-down/grip- adjustments in units of 10 microns. up timings and speeds for the grip rollers are changed in order to avoid gripping When servicing the subscanning unit, exercise due care not to bend or fold the center unevenness relative to their respective reading speeds.
  • Page 137 MD-68 5.7 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit Erasure Conveyor Unit 5.7.1 Movable Guide 5.8.1 Switchback Mechanism This guide leads the IP to the rubber rollers. It is intended to prevent IP jams. It performs IP switchback (operation to switch front to back, and vice versa). The conveyance path where the switchback is performed is a location where the IP is bent most within the machine.
  • Page 138 MD-69 5.8.2 Side-Positioning Mechanism 5.8.3 Filter of Erasure Lamp It performs side-positioning prior to cassette insertion. It is intended to prevent Do not use ethanol for cleaning the filter face of the erasure lamp. Clean it with a cassette insertion error. moistened cloth. It differs from those used in its predecessors. MD-69 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 139 MD-70 6. Nothing MD-70 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 140 MD-71 7. Updated Contents of the Software RU software version Corresponding item Reason Reference Programs V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.3 V2.4 A description of an error message is Listed below are the updated items in the respective versions of the RU software, RU changed as appropriate. Changed {MT:2.} PC-TOOL and IPL software programs.
  • Page 141 MD-72 RU software version RU software version Corresponding item Reason Reference Corresponding item Reason Reference V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.3 V2.4 V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.3 V2.4 The problem is solved, that two IPs return When a large volume of data flows into to the same shelf when an IP jam occurs Corrected the network port of the RU due to wrong and the RU is rebooted.
  • Page 142 MD-73  RU PC-TOOL RU software version Corresponding item Reason Reference V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.3 V2.4 RU software version The problem is solved, that “Invalid V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.3 V2.4 response from the Start-read command Corresponding item Reason Reference RU PC-TOOL version CL” (error code: 11527) appears on the third RU and those that follow and an Corrected...
  • Page 143 MD-74  IPL Software RU software version V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.3 V2.4 RU software version Corresponding item Reason Reference RU PC-TOOL version V2.0 V2.1 V2.2 V2.3 V2.4 Corresponding item Reason Reference V2.6 V3.0 V3.2 V3.4 V3.6 RU PC-TOOL version - [MUTL] – [Software Check] V2.6 V3.0 V3.2...
  • Page 144 MD-75 7.2 Addition of Function of Reading IP Type 7.2.1 Outline of Function of Reading the IP Type ST-BD ST-BD (Only for CR-IR 363) This reads an IP (IP type ST-BD) inserted into the ST-BD cassette as the IP type ST- This is a new additional function of the RU software V2.0. When the RU software is updated in version from V1.6 or earlier to V2.0 or later, the The RU recognizes the type of the IP depending on the type of the cassette inserted.
  • Page 145 MD-76 7.3 Nothing MD-76 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 146 MD-77 7.4 Deletion of the Secure Information from the Machine-Specific Data The specifications are changed in the RU software V2.1. The secure information includes two IP addresses of “Secure Host” and “Secure Net” displayed when the RU is booted in the maintenance mode. The secure information is not used now. MD-77 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 147 MD-78 7.5 Countermeasures to IP Overrun when the 7.5.2 Procedures of Changing the IPL Software Version Network Is Highly Loaded Described below are the procedures of changing the IPL software version. Insert the CD-ROM containing the IPL software version to which the The CPU of the reading unit monitors conditions of respective sensors in the machine software is to be changed into the CL.
  • Page 148 MD-79 Press the [ENTER] key after the following window appears. Reboot the RU. REFERENCE You can check the IPL software version in “IPL VERSION” displayed by selecting RU PC-TOOL, “MUTL” and “For Design” in order named. MD-79 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 149 MD-80 7.6 Defective Erasure Lamp Detecting  RU Software V2.4: The Erasure Operating Range (Upper Limit) of the Erasure Lamp Unit Is Changed, and a Countermeasure to Function and Improvement of Temperature Shorten the Latency Time Waiting for the Cool-Down Is Taken. Conditioning A fact that there is a machine frequently waiting for the cool-down was known in the Addition of the function of detecting a failure of the lamp temperature detection market. The analysis revealed that there was a fluctuation of approximately 10°C in thermistor and improvement in the function of warming up/cooling down the RU...
  • Page 150 MD-81 7.7 Addition of Function of Indicating the 7.7.3 Indication of the Out-of-the Erasure Operating Range in ERROR DB (ERROR DB) Erasure Lamp Temperature A function of indicating that the erasure lamp unit is out of the erasure operating This is a new additional function of the RU software V2.4. The function is added as temperature is added to the ERROR DB of the RU PC-TOOL V3.6. part of the improvement for warm-up/cool-down of the erasure lamp unit.
  • Page 151 MD-82 7.8 Addition of Function of Checking the 7.8.2 MUTL Operation Window and the Results Indication Conveyance Path Sensor The conveyance sensor check is added to [MUTL]-[Mechanical 1 check]. Clicking the [Sensor Check] button, operating statuses of the eleven sensors shown This is a new additional function of the RU PC-TOOL V3.0. in the left-hand on the window, which are located on the IP conveyance path, can be viewed at a glance. The results of the execution are displayed on the left-hand window on the MUTL screen.
  • Page 152 Be sure to use the RU PC-TOOL V3.6 or later for upgrading in version. If the RU PC-TOOL V3.6 is unavailable for some reason, take the following procedures. Right-click on the Start menu of the Windows, and select [Explore]. Uncheck the checkbox of [Read-only]. Click [Apply] and click [OK]. Select the following folder. "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IR363 (or 362)\SYSTEM\IP address (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX)\MACHINE\COLLECT" MD-83 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 153 MD-84 Select the following folder. Uncheck the checkbox of [Read-only]. Click [Apply] and click [OK]. "C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IR363 (or 362)\SYSTEM\IP address (XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX)\MACHINE\OPTICAL" Select the “SCN_PSO3.DAT” and “SCN_PSU3.DAT” files. Select [Properties] from the menu displayed by right-clicking. MD-84 011-202-11E CR-IR 363 Service Manual 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 154 The displayed data appears in the order of “Year/month/day; Hour/min/sec; … Mode This is a new additional function to the RU software V2.4. IP size; IP serial number and Detected erasure dose”. 7.10.1 OPER.LOG and Storage Folder The operation log is automatically stored in the following folder of the CL. “C:\program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\Machine folder (example: CR-IR 363)\system\IP address (example: 172.16.1.112)\log\TRACE” The following three kinds of operation log files are available. OPER.LOG: The latest log.
  • Page 155 MD-86 7.11 Countermeasure against Abnormal Indication on the ERROR DB This is a problem that the error name and description are not displayed. This problem occurs when the RU software installed in the RU does not coincide with the ERROR DB version of the CL. 7.11.1 Abnormal Indication on the ERROR DB Window The error name and description are not displayed under the following conditions.
  • Page 156 MD-87 7.12 Countermeasure against the Whitened Image Display  RU software V2.3 or earlier Image data read from the IP is written in the frame memory of the IMG17A/B board in the reader. It is simultaneously transferred to the CPU91A board and sent via the network to the CR Console. The CPU91A board sometimes detects that the image data transferred between the IMG17A/B board and the CPU91A board is insufficient.
  • Page 157 Control Sheet Revision Pages affected Issue date Reason number 08.25.2003 Corrections (FM4098) All pages 10.10.2003 Corrections (FM4160) 2-5, 8, 14, 16, 25, 27-30, 33-38, 44-46, 50-53, 58, 59, 59.1, 59.2, 60-73, 75, 76, 78, 79, 81-83, 85, 86, 88-113, CR-IR 363 Service Manual 113.1, 113.2, 114-118, 120-122, 124-133,135, 136, 138-142, 145, 148, 151, 154, 157, 160, 163, 166, 169, 172,...
  • Page 158 MT-1 Overview of Troubleshooting n Flow of Troubleshooting The flow of RU troubleshooting greatly varies depending on whether the associated error log exists. When you start a troubleshooting procedure, be sure to confirm the error log. l When the error is logged Note the error code table, analysis flow, and check flow to identify the cause of the error. l When the error is not logged Note the check flow to identify the cause of the error. n How to Use the Analysis Flow If many parts are in error, the checks to be performed and procedural reference sections (check flow) are sequentially indicated in the flow.
  • Page 159 MT-2 Flow of Troubleshooting n Error Classifications RU errors can be roughly classified into the following five categories: 1. Errors causing the CL screen or the LCD of the RU to display an error code Trouble occurred Mechanical, electrical, scanner, or software errors that cause the CL screen or the LCD of the RU to display an error code upon error detection Checking the Error Log 2.
  • Page 160 MT-3 Analysis and Check Flow Marks n Examples of Analysis/Check Flow Mark Usage In the Troubleshooting volume, troubleshooting procedures are described in the form l Example 1: Example of operation item of a flow. Various marks are used for flow simplification. n Marks Used in Flows Refer to pages in "Chapter 13, Replace the CPU91A board 13.2 CPU91A Board"...
  • Page 161 MT-4 How to View "1.4 Troubleshooting with Error Log" Each page consists of two vertical columns lying side by side. The left-hand side describes the “analysis procedure” and the right-hand side furnishes “supplementary information”. When you read the Troubleshooting volume for the first time, you should read not only the left-hand side but also the "detailed information" on the right-hand side to understand the background, objective, and other details of the troubleshooting procedure.
  • Page 162 MT-5 Troubleshooting from Error Log n Purpose of Making a Backup of the Error Log An error log is added to the file whenever an error occurs during the operation of the machine, and when the file becomes full, its entries are overwritten on a first-in, first- 1.4.1 Checking the Error Log out basis. Using the RU PC-TOOL ERROR DB, view the error log and check the occurrence of Before troubleshooting, back up the error log, which contains the information about error codes.
  • Page 163 MT-6 1.4.2 Determining the Error Code of the Encountered n Error Occurrence Time Recording in Error Log Trouble When errors occur at RU startup, their occurrence time indications vary with the error occurrence timing. Group the errors that occurred. l When errors occurred after "time data" was acquired from the CL Locate the error that is responsible for the encountered trouble (the Determine the order of error occurrences in accordance with the "occurrence time"...
  • Page 164 MT-7 1.4.3 Viewing the Error Code Table to Locate the n Error Code Table Description Associated Analysis Flow The error code table lists error codes in ascending order to facilitate your error code search. Each error code is furnished with an error name and a brief description of error occurrence conditions.
  • Page 165 MT-8 1.4.4 Viewing the Check Flows in Accordance with an Analysis Flow <Check Flow> <Example of Analysis Flow> 18. Board Test in MUTL 10347, 10348 Start with of an analysis flow and perform the steps indicated within START From the error code table, search another error code that occurred.
  • Page 166 MT-9 n Error Code Detail l Y: Error category 0: OS (operating system software), libraries 1: Image processing CPU 2: Scanner control (for front side) 3: Conveyance control 4: Overall control 5: Network control 6: Scanner control (for back side) 7: Electrical/hardware related 8: Reserved l X: Error level...
  • Page 167 MT-10 Error Code Table Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM, error 10001 File open error (1) is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the SD {MT:18.} RAM. During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM, error 10002 File read error (1) is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the SD {MT:18.} RAM. During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM, error 10003 File format error (1) is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the SD {MT:18.} RAM. During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM, error 10004 File write error (1) is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the SD...
  • Page 168 MT-11 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SD RAM, error 10014 File close error (2) is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the SD {MT:18.} RAM. When an attempt is made to operate a motor or the like during bootup or routine processing, the specified device 10060 Device open error {MT:18.} cannot be opened. Barcode reader communication During bootup or during routine processing, communication error occurs between the CPU91A board and barcode 10061 reader (BCR), so that communication cannot be established.
  • Page 169 MT-12 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Image processing initialization During bootup or during routine processing, when an attempt is made to initialize the image processing section of 10100 the IMG board, 12101 error is detected. {MT:18.} error Because it is detected three or more times, fatal error results.
  • Page 170 MT-13 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow - During bootup or during routine processing, because the fuse (H011 on the SCN17A/SCT17B board) is blown, ± 15V is not supplied to the SCN17A/SCT17B board, and the photomultiplier (PMT/PMR), start-point detection (SYN), laser (LDD), and SCN board (PLL) functions are disabled.
  • Page 171 MT-14 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup, error for the polygon lock signal (PONL, POKL) is detected so that the polygonal mirror function is 10261 Polygon rotation error (1) disabled. The start-point detection (SYN) and leading-edge detection (SED) functions are also disabled (detail code: {MT:5.8} 903403, 003400, 902403).
  • Page 172 MT-15 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Side-positioning unit IP During routine processing, the IP transport motor (MC3) is driven for IP side-positioning conveyance, but the side- 10346 positioning IP sensor (SC3) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. {MT:4.1} conveyance error Subscanning unit IP leading-edge During routine processing excluding "secondary erasure," the subscanning motor (MZ1) is driven, but the IP 10347 leading-edge sensor (SZ1) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
  • Page 173 MT-16 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Switchback unit IP conveyance During bootup/routine processing, the branch path changeover guide drive solenoid (SOLE1) and IP transport motor 10354 (ME1) are driven for IP switchback operation, but the CLOSE state of the post-reading conveyance standby IP {MT:4.5} error (1) sensor (SE1) is detected.
  • Page 174 MT-17 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Post-erasure path guide status During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (ME1, MB1, MB2) is driven to convey the IP to the cassette 10362 after the IP is erased, and the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) transitions to CLOSE; however, the IP feed/load sensor {MT:4.6} error (2) (SB1/2/3/4) for other than the shelf of interest transitions to CLOSE.
  • Page 175 MT-18 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Side-positioning unit grip HP During bootup/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MC2) is driven to perform grip home-positioning of the side- 10374 positioning conveyor unit; however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the grip release HP sensor (SC2) is not detected. After {MT:4.8} detection error two retries are executed, this is not detected, so that the system goes down.
  • Page 176 MT-19 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup/M-Utility, the IP stopper drive motor (MZ4) is driven to perform home-positioning of the IP stopper; 10403 IP stopper HP detection error however, the OPEN or CLOSE of the IP stopper HP sensor (SZ5) is not detected. After two retries are executed, {MT:4.14} this is not detected, so that the system goes down.
  • Page 177 MT-20 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to correct Driving-shaft grip correction error the grip speed of the driving shaft for the GR type; however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) does not 10416 transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.
  • Page 178 MT-21 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup, the pre-convergence IP sensor (SB6) and side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) are CLOSE, 10422 IP-initialization IP search error (3) and the post-reading conveyance standby IP sensor (SE1) or switchback standby IP sensor (SE2) is CLOSE for the {MT:4.16} remaining IP search processing.
  • Page 179 MT-22 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During M-Utility, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal operation; however, the 10435 Dust removal operation error (1) {MT:4.17} dust removal HP sensor (SZ4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time. During M-Utility, the dust removal motor (MZ3) is driven (clockwise) to perform dust removal operation; however, the 10436 Dust removal operation error (2) {MT:4.17}...
  • Page 180 MT-23 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Initialization feed path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing; however, 10443 the pre-BCR IP sensor (SB5) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.18} conveyance error (1) (UP) Initialization feed path IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing;...
  • Page 181 MT-24 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup, the IP transport motor (MC3) and subscanning motor (MZ1) are driven to perform the remaining IP Initialization side-positioning unit search processing; however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) does not transition to CLOSE within the 10450 {MT:4.19} specified period of time. (In the case that the IP is detected in the side-positioning unit for the subscanning conveyor...
  • Page 182 MT-25 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Initialization subscanning unit IP During bootup, the IP transport motor (MC3) is driven to perform the remaining IP search processing; however, the 10458 post-reading conveyance IP sensor (SD2) does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time. {MT:4.35} ejection error (2) Initialization IP position During bootup, the CMOS information of the machine (IP found) does not coincide with the remaining IP search 10459 processing result (IP not found) so that the system goes down by user selection.
  • Page 183 MT-26 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Image data variation or image An abnormal virtual data change was detected when the virtual data transfer diagnostics was conducted for bootup. In the virtual data transfer diagnostics for bootup, an abnormal virtual data change, disconnected image signal 11287 signal connector error during connector, or erroneous connector connection was detected.
  • Page 184 MT-27 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During routine processing/M-Utility, the IP transport motor (MB1, MB2, MC3) is driven to convey the IP from the 11333 Feed IP conveyance error (2) feed/load conveyor unit to the side-positioning conveyor unit; however, the side-positioning entrance IP sensor (SG1) {MT:4.23} does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
  • Page 185 MT-28 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is driven to load 11366 Load IP suction error (1) the IP to the cassette; however, the suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition to OPEN within the specified {MT:4.26} period of time. Though the retries (twice) are executed, the IP cannot be sucked. During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the IP is sucked to perform suction conveyance of the IP from the feed/load conveyor unit to the cassette;...
  • Page 186 MT-29 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow <User operation> This error occurs during image output when the menu is not selected . 11511 Patient information not registered <Occurrence condition> The patient information corresponding to the barcode of the processed IP has not been registered in the CL. Alternatively, the barcode cannot be read because the barcode affixed on the IP is soiled or the like.
  • Page 187 MT-30 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup, when the file is loaded from the FLASH ROM on the IMG17A/IMG17B board into the SDRAM, error 11710 External file open error is detected for the file residing in the FLASH ROM. Alternatively, an error is detected for the file residing in the SDRAM. Thermistor failure detection During bootup, it is detected that temperature control of the erasure unit is disabled due to temperature thermistor 11731 (THE1) error. {MT:6.5} (during erasure initialization) Lamp unlit detection (during During bootup, the erasure lamps are turned on to check their lighting, but a single center lamp (socket L3) of the 11737...
  • Page 188 MT-31 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow The life end warning message appeared because a predetermined cumulative erasure lamp illumination time was 11791 Erasure lamp cleaning end 1 exceeded. The message appeared and the error was logged because the life end of the IP suction pump was reached. 11905 IP suction pump life end Replace the pump.
  • Page 189 MT-32 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During routine processing, a timeout of the frame clock lock (information indicative of the leading edge of the image 12148 Image frame clock timeout {MT:6.1} data) sent from the SCN17A/SCT17B board is detected by the sub-CPU. (30 seconds) An error is detected for the pixel clock from the sub-CPU of the IMG17A/IMG17B board to the SCN17A/SCT17B Image processing pixel clock board.
  • Page 190 MT-33 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow 12202 Leading-edge detection error During bootup, only error for the leading-edge detection signal (SED1L) is detected. {MT:5.14} During bootup, an SCN board diagnostic error (no main-scan sync signal is generated) associated with polygon 12203 SCN sync signal error {MT:5.8}...
  • Page 191 MT-34 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow 12225 Reading status error During routine processing, error is detected for the VSYNC signal on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MT:18.} 12226 Operation line status error During routine processing, error is detected for the SEDTM/FCLKTM signal on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. {MT:18.} During bootup or during routine processing, error is detected for the PLL function, polygon rotation function, start- 12241...
  • Page 192 MT-35 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup, only error for the lock signal (POKL, PONL) from the polygonal mirror (POL) is detected (detail code: 12263 Polygon rotation error (3) 002001). {MT:5.8} If error for the SEDTM or FCLKTM signal on the SCN17A/SCT17B board is detected, the detail code is 002003. During bootup or during routine processing, error for the signals (PONL, POKL, PINDXL) from the polygonal mirror and the SEDTM signal on the SCN17A/SCT17B board is detected (detail code: 001002).
  • Page 193 MT-36 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Scanning optics unit board error During bootup, the laser (LDD), start-point detection (SYN), and leading-edge detection (SED) functions are 12283 disabled due to laser failure or disconnected connector. {MT:5.15} during bootup 12284 LD monitor value error warning During IP reading, the laser drive current value (LDIF) becomes more than 1.4 times the factory default value.
  • Page 194 MT-37 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During routine processing, because scanner-related error is detected, the IP is returned to the cassette and scanner 12298 Scanner retry error {MT:5.11} initialization is performed, with a retry made for routine processing. 12299 Error for scanner, etc.
  • Page 195 MT-38 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During routine processing/M-Utility/abnormality processing, the IP leak valve (SVA1/2/3/4) is driven to convey the 12331 IP-feed air leak warning IP from the cassette to the feed/load conveyor unit, and the IP suction pump (PA1/2/3/4) is stopped; however, the {MT:4.41} suction sensor (SA5/11/17/23) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time.
  • Page 196 MT-39 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow FFM motor rpm out of During routine processing except for secondary erasure, the motor rotation W.F. error of the subscanning motor (MZ1) 12348 for the W.F. monitoring operation is detected. {MT:4.29} specification During bootup/routine processing, the IP transport motor (MD2, ME1) is driven to convey the IP to the erasure 12350...
  • Page 197 MT-40 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the convergence path changeover guide drive motor (MB3) is driven to 12370 Path guide HP detection retry (2) perform home-positioning of the path changeover guide (feed/load conveyor unit); however, the path changeover {MT:4.7} shelf sensor (SB7/8/9) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a retry.
  • Page 198 MT-41 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Post-reading conveyor unit grip During routine processing/primary erasure/M-Utility, the grip release motor (MD1) is driven after IP reading; 12381 however, the grip release HP sensor (SD1) does not transition to CLOSE, so that home-positioning is performed. {MT:4.9} HP detection retry (4) Erasure unit grip HP detection...
  • Page 199 MT-42 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the side-positioning motor (ME2) is driven for one pulse to perform Erasure unit side-positioning side-positioning mechanism home-positioning of the erasure conveyor unit; however, the erasure side-positioning 12390 {MT:4.33} mechanism HP sensor (SE4) does not transition to CLOSE within the specified period of time, thus resulting in a mechanism HP detection retry (1) retry.
  • Page 200 MT-43 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Cleaning guide HP detection During bootup/routine processing/M-Utility, the cleaning guide drive motor (MC4) is driven to release the grip of 12402 the cleaning guide (guide-up); however, the cleaning guide HP sensor (SC4) does not transition to CLOSE, so that {MT:4.13} warning home-positioning is performed.
  • Page 201 MT-44 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Driving-shaft grip speed correction For the correction processing during bootup/at the end of reading, the grip drive motor (MZ2) is driven to perform 12418 operation for correcting the grip speed of the driving shaft; however, the driving-side grip release HP sensor (SZ2) {MT:4.15} failure does not transition to OPEN within the specified period of time.
  • Page 202 MT-45 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Forbidden Response to INQ Although the INQ command was transmitted from the RU to the CL immediately after cassette insertion during 12525 routine processing, a rejection command was received from the CL. After the processed IP returns to a cassette, {MT:14.} command the cassette is ejected so that the associated message appears on the RU panel.
  • Page 203 MT-46 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Back-side communication receive During bootup, or during routine processing, or in the Maintenance Utility, communication between the CPU91A 12697 board and SCT17B board can be done; however, data size error is detected from the SCT17B board. {MT:5.19} size error CPU board initial diagnostic test...
  • Page 204 MT-47 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow 12770 Erasure lamp cleaning end 1 During bootup, an error was detected in the communication between the CPU23B board and ERS board. 12771 INV board port 2 failure It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the INV-board-mounted fuse for port 2 was blown. 12772 INV board port 3 failure It was detected during bootup or routine processing that the INV-board-mounted fuse for port 3 was blown.
  • Page 205 MT-48 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow 12822 Power supply B021 error During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B021" fuse (F2) on the DRV17A board is blown. {MT:9.} 12823 Power supply B031 error During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B031"...
  • Page 206 MT-49 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow 12842 Power supply B161 error During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B161" fuse (F1) on the DRV17B board is blown. {MT:9.} 12843 Power supply B171 error During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the "B171"...
  • Page 207 MT-50 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the voltage of the DRV17A-related +5V power 12860 Power supply C error 1 {MT:9.} supply is not outputted. During bootup and during routine processing, it is detected that the voltage of the DRV17B-related +5V power 12861 Power supply C error 2 {MT:9.}...
  • Page 208 MT-51 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow 12908 [FRONT]S-value fluctuations (1) The error was logged because S-value was fluctuated over 50% from initial value. 12909 [FRONT]S-value fluctuations (2) The error was logged because S-value was fluctuated over 70% from initial value. 12910 [BACK]S-value fluctuations (1) The error was logged because S-value was fluctuated over 50% from initial value. 12911 [BACK]S-value fluctuations (2) The error was logged because S-value was fluctuated over 70% from initial value. <Service> - Because the touch panel is not calibrated after replacement of the IMG board and LCD panel, the file cannot be Touch panel calibration file load loaded. 13032 - During bootup, the touch panel calibration file cannot be loaded from the FLASH ROM to the SD RAM. - File loading could not be accomplished because no touch panel correction was provided after the RU application restoration procedure was performed.
  • Page 209 MT-52 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow SHD/POLYGON correction data - The correction is performed with the cleared portion due to image format displacement or with the image other 13228 than FLAT. The shading correction should be performed again. error - During shading correction of the Maintenance Utility, error is detected for the correction calculation.
  • Page 210 MT-53 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Driven-shaft grip release velocity When the grip drive motor (MZ2) was used in the routine processing or M-Utility mode to monitor the speed of a 13413 driven shaft grip release operation other than for secondary erasure, the speed deviated from normal but remained {MT:4.15} correction process operation within the acceptable range.
  • Page 211 MT-54 Error Analysis Error Name Occurrence Condition Code Flow Back-side scanner send/receive When control communication was established between the CPU17A board and SCT17B board during bootup or 13695 routine processing or in the Maintenance Utility, a scanner unit error was detected. Error recovery was achieved by retry warning performing a retry operation.
  • Page 212 The error code table is stored as an access file (.mdb) in the installation CD-ROM of the RU software. The following example shows a path on which the CR-IR 363 error code table is stored when the installation CD-ROM of the RU software V2.4 is inserted into the D drive: D:\FujiFilm\FCR\CR-IR363\2.4\common\TOOL\EcodeMan.mdb.
  • Page 213 MT-56 Detail Code How to Understand Detail Code The error log contains the operation mode of the RU and detail code associated with the error that occurred. This section describes the detail code display format and meaning of each item. n Display of Detail Code l Sensor status 0: OPEN...
  • Page 214 MT-57 Detail Codes for Scanner Errors n Meaning of Six-Digit Detail Code To each bit of a six-digit detail code is assigned an object to be checked during error Scanner errors are detected by checking a plurality of scanner I/O states and finding a check, so that a bit value of “1” indicates that the object to checked is in error. combination of defects and/or failures.
  • Page 215 MT-58 Error Code Analysis Flow: Check the sensor (SC3). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Mechanism Check the sensor (SG1). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 1 Check the motor (MB2). 10343, 10344, 10346 {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} n Analysis Flow Check the motor (MC3).
  • Page 216 MT-59 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 2 MUTL indicates that the light-collecting mirror operation is normal? {MU:5.3 [6-6-1]_Dust Removal HP} 10347, 10348 n Analysis Flow Check the sensor (SD2). Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Check the sensor (SZ1).
  • Page 217 MT-60 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board} {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board} {MC:13.7_SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board} {MC:13.8_SNS17A/SNS17D Board} Motor (MZ3) and spur gear properly mounted? {MC:12.14_Dust Removal Motor (MZ3)} {MC:12.18_Spur Gears} Restore Check the sensor (SD2).
  • Page 218 MT-61 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 3 Check the motor (MZ1). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} 10349 Check the motor (MD2). n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Check the motor (MC3). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? {MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}...
  • Page 219 MT-62 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 4 Check the sensor (SE2). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 10350, 10351, 10352, 10353 Check the motor (MD2). n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Check the motor (ME1).
  • Page 220 MT-63 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 5 Check the sensor (SE1). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 10354, 10355 Check the sensor (SE2). n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} RU software is of version 1.4 or later? Check the motor (ME1). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} Update the RU software to the version 1.4 or later.
  • Page 221 MT-64 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 6 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} 10359, 10360, 10361, 10362, 10363, 10461, 12359, 12360, 12363 n Analysis Flow Check the sensors (SB1, SB2, SB3, and SB4). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} RU software is of version 1.5 or later? Check the sensor (SB5).
  • Page 222 MT-65 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 7 Check the sensors (SB7, SB8, and SB9). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 10369, 10371, 10421, 12369, 12370, 12371 Check the sensor (SB11). n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Check the motor (MB3).
  • Page 223 MT-66 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 8 Check the motor (MC2). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} 10374, 12374, 12375, 12376, 12377 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the boards in the order named. 1.
  • Page 224 MT-67 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 9 Check the motor (MD1). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} 10378, 12378, 12379, 12380, 12381 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the boards in the order named. 1.
  • Page 225 MT-68 4.10 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 10 Check the motor (ME3). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} 10382, 12382, 12383, 12384, 12385 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the boards in the order named. 1.
  • Page 226 MT-69 4.11 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 11 Check the motor (MC1). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} 10386, 12386, 12387, 12388, 12389 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the boards in the order named. 1.
  • Page 227 MT-70 4.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 12 Check the motors (MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} 10394, 12394, 12395, 12396 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the boards in the order named. 1.
  • Page 228 MT-71 4.13 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 13 Check the motor (MC4). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} 10398, 12398, 12399, 12400, 12401, 12402 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the boards in the order named. 1.
  • Page 229 MT-72 4.14 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 14 Check the motor (MZ4). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} 10403, 10406, 12403, 12404, 12405, 12406, 12407 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the boards in the order named. 1.
  • Page 230 MT-73 4.15 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 15 Check the sensor (SZ3). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 10410, 10411, 10412, 10413, 10414, 10415, 10416, 10417, 10418, 10419, 12417, 12418, 13411, 13413 Check the motor (MZ2). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} n Analysis Flow Error recurs? Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
  • Page 231 MT-74 4.16 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 16 Check the sensor (SB6). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 10420, 10422, 10425, 10426 Check the sensors (SB7, SB8, and SB9). n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} RU software is of version 1.5 or later? Check the sensor (SB11).
  • Page 232 MT-75 Error recurs? Replace the boards in the order named. 1. SNS17A/B board {MC:13.7_SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board} {MC:13.8_SNS17A/SNS17D Board} 2. DRV17A/B board {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board} {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board} 3. CPU91A board {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. Replace the error-causing board.
  • Page 233 MT-76 4.17 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 17 Check the sensor (SZ4). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 10430, 10431, 10432, 10433, 10434, 10435, 10436, 10437, 10438, 12430, 12433, 12434 Check the motor (MZ3). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} n Analysis Flow Error recurs? Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
  • Page 234 MT-77 4.18 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 18 Check the sensor (SB5). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 10440, 10441, 10442, 10443, 10444, 10445, 10446, 10447, 12440, 12441 Check the sensor (SB6). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} n Analysis Flow Check the sensor (SG1). Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
  • Page 235 MT-78 Error recurs? Replace the boards in the order named. 1. SNS17A/B board {MC:13.7_SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board} {MC:13.8_SNS17A/SNS17D Board} 2. DRV17A/B board {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board} {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board} 3. CPU91A board {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. Replace the error-causing board.
  • Page 236 MT-79 4.19 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 19 Check the motor (MC3). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} 10448, 10449, 10450 Check the motor (MB1). n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Check the motor (MB2).
  • Page 237 MT-80 4.20 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 20 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} 10451, 10452 n Analysis Flow Check the sensor (SB6). Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Check the motor (ME1).
  • Page 238 MT-81 4.21 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 21 Check the sensors (SA2, SA8, SA14, and SA20). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 11320, 11322, 11425 Check the sensors (SA3, SA9, SA15, and SA21). n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
  • Page 239 MT-82 4.22 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 22 Check the sensors (SB1, SB2, SB3, and SB4). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 11330, 12330 Check the motor (MB1). n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Error recurs? The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? {MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}...
  • Page 240 MT-83 4.23 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 23 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} 11332, 11333, 11334, 11335, 11336, 11337, 12332, 12333,12334, 12335, 12336, 12337, 12363 n Analysis Flow Check the sensor (SC3). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} RU software is of version 1.5 or later? Check the sensor (SG1).
  • Page 241 MT-84 Error recurs? Replace the boards in the order named. 1. SNS17A/B board {MC:13.7_SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board} {MC:13.8_SNS17A/SNS17D Board} 2. DRV17A/B board {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board} {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board} 3. CPU91A board {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. Replace the error-causing board.
  • Page 242 MT-85 4.24 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 24 Barcode readers (BCRA1, BCRA2, BCRA3, and BCRA4) normal? {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 11338, 11339 Replace the barcode readers (BCRA1, BCRA2, BCRA3, and BCRA4). {MC:5.12_Barcode Reader Assembly} n Analysis Flow Error recurs? Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
  • Page 243 MT-86 4.25 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 25 Check the sensor (SG2). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 11340 Check the sensors (SA6, SA12, SA18, and SA24). n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Check the motor (MB1).
  • Page 244 MT-87 4.26 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 26 Check the sensors (SA5, SA11, SA17, and SA23). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 11328, 11329, 11366, 11367, 12328, 12329, 12366, 12367 Check the pumps (PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4). {MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators} n Analysis Flow Error recurs? Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
  • Page 245 MT-88 4.27 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 27 Check the sensor (SE2). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 10356, 10357, 10358, 12357 Check the sensor (SB6). n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} RU software is of version 1.4 or later? Check the motor (ME1).
  • Page 246 MT-89 4.28 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 28 An IP suitable for the machine set in position? Replace the IP. 11343, 12343 n Analysis Flow IP barcode free from scratch, soil, or peeling? Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the IP.
  • Page 247 MT-90 4.29 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 29 Check the motor (MZ1). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} 12348 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the boards in the order named. 1. SNS17A/B board The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? {MC:13.7_SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board} {MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}...
  • Page 248 MT-91 4.30 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 30 Check the sensor (SE2). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 12350 Check the motor (MD2). n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Check the motor (ME1). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? {MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}...
  • Page 249 MT-92 4.31 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 31 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} 10364, 10365, 10460, 10462 n Analysis Flow Check the sensors (SB1, SB2, SB3, and SB4). RU software is of version 1.5 or later? {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Update the RU software to the version 1.5 or later.
  • Page 250 MT-93 4.32 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 32 Check the motors (MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 12408, 12409 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the boards in the order named. 1.
  • Page 251 MT-94 4.33 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 33 Check the motor (ME2). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} 10390, 12390, 12391, 12392 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the boards in the order named. 1.
  • Page 252 MT-95 4.34 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 34 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} 10453 n Analysis Flow Check the sensor (SE1). Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Check the motor (ME1).
  • Page 253 MT-96 4.35 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 35 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} 10454, 10455, 10456, 10457, 10458 n Analysis Flow Check the motor (MC3). Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} Check the motor (MD2).
  • Page 254 MT-97 4.36 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 36 CPU91A, DRV17A/B, and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} 10459, 11459 n Analysis Flow Error recurs? Check the error log in the ERROR DB. The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? Replace the boards in the order named.
  • Page 255 MT-98 4.37 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 37 Check the sensors (SA3, SA9, SA15, and SA21). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 11321, 11323, 11324, 11325, 11499, 12321, 12324 Check the solenoids (SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and SOLA4). n Analysis Flow {MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators} Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
  • Page 256 MT-99 4.38 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 38 Check the sensors (SA1, SA7, SA13, and SA19). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 12322 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Replace the boards in the order named. 1.
  • Page 257 MT-100 4.39 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 39 Check the sensors (SA1, SA7, SA13, and SA19). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 12320 Check the sensors (SA3, SA9, SA15, and SA21). n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Check the solenoids (SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and SOLA4).
  • Page 258 MT-101 4.40 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 40 Check the sensors (SA6, SA12, SA18, and SA24). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 11341 Barcode readers (BCRA1, BCRA2, BCRA3, and BCRA4) normal? n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Replace the barcode readers (BCRA1, BCRA2, BCRA3, and BCRA4). Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
  • Page 259 MT-102 4.41 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 41 Check the sensors (SA4, SA10, SA16, and SA22). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 12331, 12368 Check the pumps (PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4). n Analysis Flow {MT:12._Procedures for Checking the Actuators} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Check the valves (SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, and SVA4).
  • Page 260 MT-103 4.42 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 42 Check the sensor (SZ4). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 10439 Check the sensor (SZ5). n Analysis Flow {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Check the motor (MZ3). {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? {MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}...
  • Page 261 MT-104 4.43 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 43 Error recurs? 10064 n Analysis Flow Replace the boards in the order named. 1. SNS17A/B board {MC:13.7_SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.8_SNS17A/SNS17D Board} 2. DRV17A/B board {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board} The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board} {MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}...
  • Page 262 MT-105 4.44 Error Code Analysis Flow: Mechanism 44 Check the sensor (SB10). {MT:10._Procedures for Checking the Sensors} 10372, 12372, 12373 Check the motor (MB3). n Analysis Flow {MT:11._Procedures for Checking the Motors} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Error recurs? The indicated error is at the beginning of the error log? {MT:1.4_Troubleshooting from Error Log}...
  • Page 263 MT-106 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner Error recurs? Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 1 Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is 10230 detected, replace the affected part. 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} n Analysis Flow 2.
  • Page 264 MT-107 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 2 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 10231 n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Errors 10230-10236 logged? Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
  • Page 265 MT-108 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 3 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 10232, 10236 n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Errors 10230-10236 logged? Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
  • Page 266 MT-109 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 4 Error recurs? 10233 n Analysis Flow Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is detected, replace the affected part. 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} 2.
  • Page 267 MT-110 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 5 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 10234 n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Errors 10230-10236 logged? Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
  • Page 268 MT-111 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 6 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 10235 n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Errors 10230-10236 logged? Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
  • Page 269 MT-112 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 7 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 12212 n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Errors 10230-10236 logged? Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
  • Page 270 MT-113 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 8 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 10244, 10261, 10283, 12203, 12204, 12213, 12244, 12261, 12262, 12263, 12264 Replace the error-causing board. n Analysis Flow {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
  • Page 271 MT-114 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 9 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 10271, 12271 n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Errors 10230-10236 logged? Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
  • Page 272 MT-115 5.10 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 10 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 10281, 12201, 12281,12282 n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Errors 10230-10236 logged? Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
  • Page 273 MT-116 5.11 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 11 Perform the diagnostics. {MU:5.3 [5-1]_Diagnostic} 10298, 12298 Error recurs? n Analysis Flow Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is detected, replace the affected part.
  • Page 274 MT-117 5.12 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 12 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 12211, 12251, 12252, 13285, 13286 n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.3_IMG17A/B Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Errors 10230-10236 logged? Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
  • Page 275 MT-118 5.13 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 13 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 12611, 12617, 12618, 12651, 12652, 13685, 13686 n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.3_IMG17A/B Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Errors 10230-10236 logged? Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
  • Page 276 MT-119 5.14 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 14 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 12202, 12255, 12256 n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. Errors 10230-10236 logged? Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
  • Page 277 MT-120 5.15 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 15 Error recurs? 10294, 11273, 12222, 12273, 12283, 12284, 13284 n Analysis Flow Replace the boards in the order named. 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. 2.
  • Page 278 MT-121 5.16 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 16 Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. 12285, 12286 n Analysis Flow Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.3_IMG17A/B Board} Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} Errors 10230-10236 logged? Check the error code table again and troubleshoot.
  • Page 279 MT-122 5.17 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 17 Error recurs? 11287, 12287 n Analysis Flow Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is detected, replace the affected part. 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} 2.
  • Page 280 MT-123 5.18 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 18 Error recurs? 11687, 12687 n Analysis Flow Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is detected, replace the affected part. 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board Check the error log in the ERROR DB. {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} 2.
  • Page 281 MT-124 5.19 Error Code Analysis Flow: Scanner 19 Error recurs? 12214, 12215, 12216, 12217, 12218, 12241, 12242, 12243, 12295, 12296, 12297, 12642 Disconnect and reconnect the connectors in the following sequence. If the error is n Analysis Flow detected, replace the affected part. 1.
  • Page 282 MT-125 Error Code Analysis Flow: Reseat the SCN17A/SCT17B board and check if the error occurs again. Electrical Replace the boards in the order named. Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 1 1. CPU91A board {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} 12148, 12149, 12150, 12151, 12152, 12153, 12702 2.
  • Page 283 MT-126 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 2 LED and LON1-5 indicators on the SNS17B board properly light? {MD:3.3.3_Correspondence between LEDs and Erasure Control Signals 11737, 11757, 11766, 11767, 12736, 12756, 12766 and FFM Control Signals} n Analysis Flow Error recurs? Check the error log in the ERROR DB.
  • Page 284 MT-127 Lamps normal? Replace the lamps. {MC:9.9_Lamps} Harnesses between the SNS17A and INV17A/B boards and between the INV17A and INV17B boars normal? Restore Sockets normal? Replace the sockets. {MC:9.13_Sockets} Error recurs when the INV17A/B board connector is disconnected and reconnected? Replace the error-causing board.
  • Page 285 MT-128 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 3 12703 n Analysis Flow START Booted up normally? Troubleshoot the bootup failure. {MT:20._Troubleshooting Failures where Error Code Is Undetectable and Machine does not Boot Up} CPU91A and SNS17A/B boards tested in MUTL normal? {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} Check the voltage of the CPU91A board test pin (TP1).
  • Page 286 MT-129 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 4 Safety thermostat (TSWE1) properly conducting? {MT:17.14_Erasure Lamps and Fan 2} 12733, 12743, 12753, 12800 Replace the safety thermostat (TSWE1). {MC:9.12_Safety Thermostat Sensor (TSWE1)} n Analysis Flow Error recurs when the CPU91A, SNS17A/B, and INV17A/B board connectors are START disconnected and reconnected? Error 12813 and 12853 logged?
  • Page 287 MT-130 Error Code Analysis Flow: Electrical 5 Reseat the CPU91A and SNS17A/B boards and check if the error occurs again. 11731, 11751, 11781 n Analysis Flow Replace the boards in the order named. 1. CPU91A board {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} START 2. SNS17A/B board {MC:13.7_SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board} {MC:13.8_SNS17A/SNS17D Board} Error 12813 logged?
  • Page 288 MT-131 Troubleshooting the Errors that Checking the IIS Cause the Inability to Update the Unless the IIS ("Internet Information Service") is not installed, the FTP server cannot be used. Software Version or Back Up the Make sure that the IIS has been installed in the CL that is used as the FTP server. Machine Shipment Control Data n Check Procedures This chapter summarizes the procedures for troubleshooting the errors that causes...
  • Page 289 MT-132 Checking the Operating Status of the FTP Checking the IP Address of the CL Server n Check Procedures n Check Procedures Exit the CL software. Exit the CL software. Double-click on the desktop. Press the key. → The “My Computer” window opens. Select [Settings] - [Control Panel].
  • Page 290 MT-133 Checking "LIST OF EXISTING RU" Click → The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens. n Check Procedures Choose and then click → The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens. Start the RU PC-TOOL. {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Make sure that the IP address of the FTP server matches “FTP-SERVER IP ADDRESS”...
  • Page 291 MT-134 Checking the FTP Server Address of the Check the IP address of the FTP server. n Check Procedures Start the Machine Maintenance. {MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} Touch the [FTP Server] button. u INSTRUCTION u Check whether the IP address setting agrees with the CL’s IP address, which can be confirmed as directed under "7.3 Checking the IP Address of the CL".
  • Page 292 MT-135 Procedures for Checking the Voltage Checking the Voltage on the CPU91A Board Test Pins (TP1) Checking the Board Locations WARNING To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the following precautions. - Do not touch the power supply terminals. - When making voltage measurements, do not touch the probe (metal portion) of a tester.
  • Page 293 MT-136 Checking the Voltage on the SCN17A/ 8.2.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins SCT17B/SCT17P Board Test Pins (CN5) n Procedures for Checking the Voltage WARNING Check if the voltage on the test pins is normal. To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the u NOTE u following precautions.
  • Page 294 MT-137 8.3.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins l #50001 or Later and #60001 or Later Measurement point Power supply Power supply voltage inspection standard n Procedures for Checking the Voltage SCN17A/ Between 2 Should be within a range from SCT17B/ +15V (ch4) and 5 of CN5...
  • Page 295 MT-138 Checking the Voltage on the DRV17A 8.4.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins Board Test Pins (TP8) n Procedures for Checking the Voltage WARNING Check if the voltage on the test pins is normal. To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the u NOTE u following precautions.
  • Page 296 MT-139 Checking the Voltage on the Power Supply 8.5.2 Checking the Voltage on Test Pins Unit (PSU17A/PSU29A) n Procedures for Checking the Voltage WARNING Check if the voltage on the test pins is normal. u NOTE u To avoid possible electric shock hazard from high voltage, observe the following precautions.
  • Page 297 MT-140 Procedures for Checking the Fuses Checking the Fuse Locations After checking the fuse locations on each of the boards, check the fuses in accordance with the procedures described in the reference section. 9.1.1 Checking the Board Locations n Fuse Locations on Each of the Boards {MT:9.1.2_List of Reference Sections} MT-140 CR-IR 363 Service Manual...
  • Page 298 MT-141 9.1.2 List of Reference Sections Fuse-mounted Fuse Fuse blow Reference section component detection circuit Fuse-mounted Fuse Fuse blow B161 Reference section component detection circuit B171 PSU17A power A011 {MT:9.2_Power Supply Unit} supply B181 A021 B191 A031 B201 {MT:9.3_SNS17B Board} SNS17B Board A041 B211...
  • Page 299 MT-142 Power Supply Unit Same error occurs when testing the circuit which controls the blown fuse detection circuit on the SNS board in the MUTL? {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} 9.2.1 Check Flow START Replace the SNS17A/B board. {MC:13.7_SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board} A lot of fuse errors (12810 to 12875) occur? {MC:13.8_SNS17A/SNS17D Board} 9.2.2 Procedures for Checking the Power Supply Unit Fuse...
  • Page 300 MT-143 SNS17B Board 9.3.2 Procedures for Checking the SNS17B Board Fuses Check the locations of the fuses on the SNS17B board. 9.3.1 Check Flow START Turn OFF the power and circuit breaker. Remove the upper right-hand side cover. {MC:3.1_Covers} Fuse on the SNS17B board normal? {MT:9.3.2_Procedures for Checking the SNS17B Board Fuses} Replace the fuse.
  • Page 301 MT-144 DRV17A/B Board Same error occurs when testing the circuit which controls the blown fuse detection circuit on the SNS board in the MUTL? {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} 9.4.1 Check Flow START Replace the SNS17A/B board. {MC:13.7_SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board} A lot of fuse errors (12810 to 12875) occur? {MC:13.8_SNS17A/SNS17D Board} Turn OFF the power and circuit breaker.
  • Page 302 MT-145 9.4.2 Procedures for Checking the DRV17A Board Fuses 9.4.3 Procedures for Checking the DRV17B Board Fuses Check the locations of the fuses on the DRV17A board. Check the locations of the fuses on the DRV17B board. Check the fuse. {MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse} Check the cable.
  • Page 303 MT-146 SCN17A/SCT17B Board 9.5.2 Procedures for Checking the SCN17A/SCT17B Board Fuses 9.5.1 Check Flow Check the locations of the fuses on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. START A lot of fuse errors (12810 to 12875) occur? Power OFF. Remove the upper right-hand side cover. {MC:3.1_Covers} Fuse on the SCN17A/SCT17B board normal? {MT:9.5.2_Procedures for Checking the SCN17A/SCT17B Board Fuses}...
  • Page 304 MT-147 INV17A/B Board Same error occurs when testing the circuit which controls the blown fuse detection circuit on the SNS board in the MUTL? {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} 9.6.1 Check Flow START Replace the SNS17A/B board. {MC:13.7_SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board} A lot of fuse errors (12810 to 12875) occur? {MC:13.8_SNS17A/SNS17D Board} Turn OFF the power and circuit breaker.
  • Page 305 MT-148 Checking the Fuse 9.6.3 Procedures for Checking the INV17B Board Fuses Check for continuity as illustrated below. Check the locations of the fuses on the INV17B board. Check the fuse. {MT:9.7_Checking the Fuse} Check the cable. {MT:9.8_Checking the Cable} Checking the Cable Referring to "17.
  • Page 306 MT-149 10. Procedures for Checking the Sensors Whether the sensor is normal or not is checked by sensor monitoring via the RU PC- TOOL and the display of the LEDs on the SNS17A/B board. 10.1 Checking the Sensors Because the sensor checking procedures differ for each of the sensors, refer to the check procedures for the sensor to be checked.
  • Page 307 MT-150 10.2 Starting and Exiting the Monitoring 10.2.2 Exiting the Monitoring Function Function Click on the [STOP] button. With the RU PC-TOOL sensor monitoring function activated, turn ON/OFF the sensor to be checked. If the sensor status changes corresponding to the ON/OFF timing, it can be judged that the sensor is normal.
  • Page 308 MT-151 10.3 Checking via the LEDs on the SNS17B 10.3.2 Procedures for Exiting the LED Check Board Exit the MUTL. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} The ON or OFF status of each sensor can be checked via the display of the LEDs of the SNS17B board.
  • Page 309 MT-152 10.4 Sensor Check Flow 1 In Sensor Check Flow 1, allow the cassette ejection sensor (SA1, 7, 13 or 19) to transition to OPEN or CLOSE by manually opening and closing the shutter of the cassette set unit, and check to ensure that the sensor status changes accordingly. n Check Flow 1 START Result of monitoring function check normal?
  • Page 310 MT-153 10.4.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (1) l NO GOOD indication For the sensor to be checked, “OPEN” or “CLOSE” is not displayed after the Start the RU PC-TOOL. shutter is opened and closed. {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} u NOTE u Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
  • Page 311 MT-154 10.4.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (1) Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. {MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check} Manually open and close the shutter, and check the LED display on the SNS17B board. - To check SA1: Open and close the shutter of shelf 1.
  • Page 312 MT-155 10.5 Sensor Check Flow 2 In Sensor Check Flow 2, allow the sensor to transition to OPEN or CLOSE by conveying the IP in the "Erasure" mode, and check to ensure that the sensor status changes accordingly. n Check Flow 2 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.5.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (2)}...
  • Page 313 MT-156 10.5.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (2) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Navigate on the LCD panel of the RU to enter the "Erasure"...
  • Page 314 MT-157 10.5.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (2) Set a cassette corresponding to the sensor to be checked. Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. Cassette insertion Cassette insertion I/O No I/O No destination destination {MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check} Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board.
  • Page 315 MT-158 10.6 Sensor Check Flow 3 In sensor check flow 3, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 3 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.6.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (3)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Result of SNS board LED check normal? {MT:10.6.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (3)} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 316 MT-159 10.6.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (3) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Select IP Removal Unit.
  • Page 317 MT-160 10.6.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (3) Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
  • Page 318 MT-161 10.7 Sensor Check Flow 4 In sensor check flow 4, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 4 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.7.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (4)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Result of SNS board LED check normal? {MT:10.7.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (4)} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 319 MT-162 10.7.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (4) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Select Feed/Load Unit.
  • Page 320 MT-163 10.7.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (4) Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
  • Page 321 MT-164 10.8 Sensor Check Flow 5 In sensor check flow 5, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 5 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.8.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (5)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Result of SNS board LED check normal? {MT:10.8.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (5)} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 322 MT-165 10.8.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (5) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.
  • Page 323 MT-166 10.8.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (5) Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
  • Page 324 MT-167 10.9 Sensor Check Flow 6 In sensor check flow 6, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 6 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.9.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (6)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Result of SNS board LED check normal? {MT:10.9.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (6)} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 325 MT-168 10.9.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (6) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 1.
  • Page 326 MT-169 10.9.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (6) Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
  • Page 327 MT-170 10.10 Sensor Check Flow 7 In sensor check flow 7, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 7 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.10.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (7)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Result of SNS board LED check normal? {MT:10.10.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (7)} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 328 MT-171 10.10.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (7) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Select Side-Positioning Conveyor 2.
  • Page 329 MT-172 10.10.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (7) Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
  • Page 330 MT-173 10.11 Sensor Check Flow 8 In sensor check flow 8, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 8 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.11.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (8)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Result of SNS board LED check normal? {MT:10.11.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (8)} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 331 MT-174 10.11.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (8) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Select Post-Reading Conveyor.
  • Page 332 MT-175 10.11.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (8) Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
  • Page 333 MT-176 10.12 Sensor Check Flow 9 In sensor check flow 9, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 9 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.12.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (9)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Result of SNS board LED check normal? {MT:10.12.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (9)} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 334 MT-177 10.12.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (9) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Select Erasure Conveyor 1.
  • Page 335 MT-178 10.12.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (9) Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
  • Page 336 MT-179 10.13 Sensor Check Flow 10 In sensor check flow 10, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 10 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.13.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (10)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Result of SNS board LED check normal? {MT:10.13.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (10)} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 337 MT-180 10.13.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (10) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Select Erasure Conveyor 1.
  • Page 338 MT-181 10.13.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (10) Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
  • Page 339 MT-182 10.14 Sensor Check Flow 11 In sensor check flow 11, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 11 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.14.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (11)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Result of SNS board LED check normal? {MT:10.14.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (11)} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 340 MT-183 10.14.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (11) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Select Sub Scanning 1.
  • Page 341 MT-184 10.14.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (11) Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
  • Page 342 MT-185 10.15 Sensor Check Flow 12 In sensor check flow 12, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 12 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.15.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (12)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Result of SNS board LED check normal? {MT:10.15.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (12)} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 343 MT-186 10.15.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (12) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Select Sub Scanning 2.
  • Page 344 MT-187 10.15.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (12) Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
  • Page 345 MT-188 10.16 Sensor Check Flow 13 In sensor check flow 13, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 13 START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.16.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (13)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Result of SNS board LED check normal? {MT:10.16.2_Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (13)} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 346 MT-189 10.16.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (13) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Select Sub Scanning 1.
  • Page 347 MT-190 10.16.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (13) Check the display of the LEDs located on the SNS17B board. Make sure that the LEDs change (from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON) during Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. operation.
  • Page 348 MT-191 10.17 Sensor Check Flow 14 In sensor check flow 14, the MUTL drives a motor to open or close sensors to check for improper sensor status changes. n Check Flow 14 START Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Start the RU in the maintenance mode. {MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} LED check results of the scanner board normal? {MT:10.17.1_Checking with a Scanner Board LED} Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 349 MT-192 10.17.1 Checking with a Scanner Board LED From the rear of the RU, insert the IP by hand and note the SOH LED on the SCN17A/SCT17B board. Start the MUTL. {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} Select Sub Scanning 1. Select Stopper HP and then set it to [RETREATED]. Turn ON the laser.
  • Page 350 MT-193 10.18 Barcode Reader Check Flow The barcode reader check flow is used to convey the IP in the “erasure” mode and check whether the barcode reader reads the IP’s barcode. n Check Flow START Result of monitoring function check normal? {MT:10.18.1_Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (14)} Return to the error code analysis flow. Cable normal? Referring to the connector and pin number in the block diagram, check the following points. 1.
  • Page 351 MT-194 10.18.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (14) Check the monitoring display. Check the display of the monitoring window of the CL. Start the RU PC-TOOL. l Example of GOOD indication {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL. {MT:10.2.1_Starting the Monitoring Function} Navigate on the LCD panel of the RU to enter the "Erasure"...
  • Page 352 MT-195 10.19 Sensor Check Flow 15 Allow the cassette IN sensor (SA2, 8, 14 or 20) to transition to OPEN or CLOSE by inserting and ejecting the cassette while the RU is started up in the maintenance mode, and check to ensure that the sensor status changes accordingly. n Check Flow 15 START Turn OFF the power of the RU.
  • Page 353 MT-196 10.19.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (15) l NO GOOD indication Neither “OPEN” nor “CLOSE” is displayed for the sensor to be checked, after the Start the RU PC-TOOL. cassette is inserted and ejected. {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} u NOTE u Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
  • Page 354 MT-197 10.19.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (15) Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. {MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check} Allow the cassette to be inserted and ejected with the hold released. Check the LED display on the SNS17B board. - To check SA2: Set a cassette in shelf 1.
  • Page 355 MT-198 10.20 Sensor Check Flow 16 Allow the cassette hold sensors (SA3, 9, 15 and 21) to transition to OPEN or CLOSE by moving the hold release arm while the RU is started up in the maintenance mode, and check to ensure that the sensor status changes accordingly. n Check Flow 16 START Turn OFF the power of the RU.
  • Page 356 MT-199 10.20.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (16) l NO GOOD indication Neither “OPEN” nor “CLOSE” is displayed for the sensor to be checked, after the Start the RU PC-TOOL. hold release arm is moved. {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} u NOTE u Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
  • Page 357 MT-200 10.20.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (16) Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. {MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check} Allow the hold release arm to move, and check the display on the LED of the SNS17B board. l GOOD indication The LED changes its status (lit to unlit or unlit to lit) when the hold release arm is moved.
  • Page 358 MT-201 10.21 Sensor Check Flow 17 Allow the inch/metric sensor (SA6, 12, 18 or 24) to open or close by manually raising/ lowering the movable guide of the cassette set unit in the Sensor Check Flow 17, and check to ensure that the sensor status changes accordingly. n Check Flow 17 START Result of monitoring function check normal?
  • Page 359 MT-202 10.21.1 Check Procedures via Monitoring Function (17) l NO GOOD indication Neither “OPEN” nor “CLOSE” is displayed for the sensor to be checked, after the Start the RU PC-TOOL. movable guide is raised/lowered. {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} u NOTE u Start monitoring of the RU PC-TOOL.
  • Page 360 MT-203 10.21.2 Check Procedures via LEDs on the SNS Board (17) Perform the procedures for starting the LED check. {MT:10.3.1_Procedures for Starting the LED Check} Manually raise/lower the movable guide, and check the display on the LED of the SNS17B board. - To check SA6: Raise/lower the movable guide of shelf 1.
  • Page 361 MT-204 11. Procedures for Checking the n Reference Sections Motors I/O NO. Reference section I/O NO. Reference section {MT:11.11} It can be checked, via the LEDs on the DRV17A/B board, to see that the signal sent when the motor is driven is received by the DRV17A/B board. {MT:11.1} {MT:11.12} n Check Flow...
  • Page 362 MT-205 11.1 Checking the MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4 Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Operation Checking the result of the operation If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to The methods for checking the operation are common to MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4.
  • Page 363 MT-206 11.2 Checking the MB1, MB2, and MC3 Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Operation Checking the result of the operation If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to The methods for checking the operation are common to MB1, MB2, and MC3. the error code table and troubleshoot again.
  • Page 364 MT-207 11.3 Checking the MB3 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Checking the result of the operation n Check Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot again. Remove the top cover.
  • Page 365 MT-208 11.4 Checking the MC1 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Checking the result of the operation n Check Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot again. Remove the top cover.
  • Page 366 MT-209 11.5 Checking the MC2 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Checking the result of the operation n Check Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot again. Remove the top cover.
  • Page 367 MT-210 11.6 Checking the MC4 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Checking the result of the operation n Check Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot again. Remove the top cover.
  • Page 368 MT-211 11.7 Checking the MZ1 Operation Drive the subscanning motor (MZ1). n Check Procedures Remove the lower right-hand side cover and lower left-hand side cover. Repeat steps 5 through 7 a certain number of times to conduct the following checks. If any abnormality is found, replace the FFM motor. {MC:3.1_Covers} l Checking the RESULT-OK indication Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode.
  • Page 369 MT-212 Stop the subscanning motor (MZ1). Exit the MUTL. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} Turn OFF the machine. Reinstall the lower right-hand side cover and lower left-hand side cover. {MC:3.1_Covers} MT-212 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-04 11.15.2004 FM4425...
  • Page 370 MT-213 11.8 Checking the MZ2 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Checking the result of the operation n Check Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot again. Remove the top cover.
  • Page 371 MT-214 11.9 Checking the MZ3 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Checking the result of the operation n Check Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot again. Remove the top cover.
  • Page 372 MT-215 11.10 Checking the MZ4 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Checking the result of the operation n Check Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot again. Remove the top cover.
  • Page 373 MT-216 11.11 Checking the MD1 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Checking the result of the operation n Check Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot again. Remove the top cover.
  • Page 374 MT-217 11.12 Checking the MD2 and ME1 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. The same operational checkout procedure is used for the MD2 and ME1. Checking the result of the operation If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot again.
  • Page 375 MT-218 11.13 Checking the ME2 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Checking the result of the operation n Check Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot again. Remove the top cover.
  • Page 376 MT-219 11.14 Checking the ME3 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Checking the result of the operation n Check Procedures If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot again. Remove the top cover.
  • Page 377 MT-220 11.15 Checking the Motor Resistance Values With reference to the block diagram, measure the motor resistance values based on the pin numbers. {MT:17.8_Sensors (SZ1 to SZ5) and FFM Motor (MZ1)} {MT:17.9_Motors (MA1 to MA4, MD1 to MD2, ME1, ME3, MZ2 to MZ3)} {MT:17.10_Motors (MB1 to MB3, MC1 to MC4, ME2, MZ4)} n List of Resistance Values of Motor Windings Reference resistance value...
  • Page 378 MT-221 12. Procedures for Checking the n Reference Sections Actuators I/O NO. Reference section I/O NO. Reference section SOLA1 SVA1 It can be checked, via the LEDs on the DRV17A/B board, to see that the signal sent SOLA2 SVA2 when the actuator is driven is received by the DRV17A/B board. {MT:12.1} {MT:12.3} SOLA3...
  • Page 379 MT-222 12.1 Checking the SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and Cassette hold pin damaged such as bent? {MC:5.37_Cassette Hold Pins} SOLA4 Operation Replace the cassette hold pin. The methods for checking the operation are common to SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and {MC:5.37_Cassette Hold Pins} SOLA4.
  • Page 380 MT-223 12.1.1 Visual Check Procedures Turn OFF the solenoid to be checked, and check to ensure that the cassette hold pin rises. Allow the solenoid to work in MUTL, and check to ensure that the cassette hold pin l MUTL operation rises/lowers normally.
  • Page 381 MT-224 12.1.2 Procedures for Checking the Cassette Hold Solenoid Turn OFF the solenoid to be checked, and check to ensure that the cassette does not come off. Allow the solenoid to be turned OFF in MUTL, and check to ensure that the solenoid l MUTL operation normally holds the cassette.
  • Page 382 MT-225 12.1.3 Procedures for Checking the LED on the DRV Board Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. l Checking the result of the operation Allow the solenoid to work in MUTL, and check the change of the LED on the DRV If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to board.
  • Page 383 MT-226 12.2 Checking the PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4 Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Operation l Checking the result of the operation If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to The methods for checking the operation are common to PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4.
  • Page 384 MT-227 12.3 Checking the SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, and SVA4 Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Operation l Checking the result of the operation If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to The methods for checking the operation are common to SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, and the error code table and troubleshoot again.
  • Page 385 MT-228 12.4 Checking the CLA1, CLA2, CLA3, and CLA4 Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. Operation l Checking the result of the operation If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to The methods for checking the operation are common to CLA1, CLA2, CLA3, and the error code table and troubleshoot again.
  • Page 386 MT-229 12.5 Checking the SOLE1 Operation Check the result of the operation via the LEDs. l Checking the result of the operation Remove the top cover. If an error code is displayed on the MUTL, instead of "RESULT-OK", then refer to {MC:3.1_Covers} the error code table and troubleshoot again.
  • Page 387 MT-230 12.6 Checking the Actuator Resistance Values l Valve With reference to the block diagram, measure the actuator resistance values based Reference resistance value I/O No. Load name on the pin numbers. Pin numbers 1 and 2 {MT:17.11_Actuators (SOLA1 to SOLA4, PA1 to PA4, SVA1 to SVA4, CLA1 to SVA1 IP leak valve (first shelf) CLA4)}...
  • Page 388 MT-231 13. Procedures for Checking the Error recurs? Scanner I/O Return to the error code analysis flow. Turn ON the HV. 13.1 Scanner I/O Check Flow CPU91A and SCN17A/SCT17B board tested in MUTL normal? START {MT:18._Board Test in MUTL} Turn OFF the HV. Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:14.5_Nothing} {MC:14.6_SCT17B Board Fuses}...
  • Page 389 MT-232 13.2 Checking Laser ON in MUTL Check to see whether the LEDs on the SCN17A/SCT17B board are normal. n Procedures l GOOD indication No abnormality exists if the indication is other than the NO GOOD indication. Remove the cover. u NOTE u - Upper right-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers}...
  • Page 390 MT-233 13.3 Checking the Cable n Procedures Turn OFF the power of the machine. Referring to the block diagram, check the following points. {MT:17._Block Diagrams} - The connector is securely plugged in. - Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2Ω or greater - Check for shorts between each of the pins →...
  • Page 391 MT-234 13.4 Checking the PMT/PMR Check to see whether the LEDs on the SCN17A/SCT17B board are normal. n Procedures l GOOD indication No abnormality exists if the indication is other than the NO GOOD indication. Remove the cover. u NOTE u - Upper right-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} The "HVON"...
  • Page 392 MT-235 14. Line Error between CL and RU Check the RU’s IP address. {MT:14.6_Checking the IP Address of the RU} 14.1 Analysis Flow for Line Error between CL PING from the CL acceptable? {MT:14.2_Checking Connection from the CL} and RU START PING from the CL acceptable? {MT:14.2_Checking Connection from the CL}...
  • Page 393 MT-236 14.2 Checking Connection from the CL Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window. Using the "PING" function of the "RU PC-TOOL", check the connection between the RU and CL. n Check Procedures Start the "RU PC-TOOL". {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select the RU that is targeted for a connection check.
  • Page 394 MT-237 14.3 Checking Configuration Information of the Check the setting of "CONNECTING EQUIPMENT". Make sure that the RU that was checked at step 4 is set. If the setting is improper, modify the setting. If nothing is set, set it anew. {FCR XG-1/CR CL Service Manual} n Check Procedures Exit the CL software.
  • Page 395 MT-238 14.4 Checking the IP Address of the CL Click → The “Local Area Connection Properties” window opens. n Check Procedures Choose and then click → The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens. Exit the CL software. Double-click on the desktop. →...
  • Page 396 MT-239 14.5 Checking the IP Address of the Master CL Check the IP address displayed. Make sure that the IP address displayed is identical to the IP address noted at step 7 of Section 14.4. n Check Procedures If it is not identical, modify "CL IP ADDRESS", and click on the [SET] button. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master CL's is to be checked, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button.
  • Page 397 MT-240 14.6 Checking the IP Address of the RU Touch the [OK] button. n Check Procedures Start the Machine Maintenance. {MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} Exit the Machine Maintenance. Touch the [RU IP Address] button. {MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance} Check the IP address of the RU.
  • Page 398 MT-241 14.7 Loopback Test 14.7.2 Loopback Test Procedure Connect the loopback cable (jig: 898Y0981) to the network cable or connector, allow . Start the Machine Maintenance. the signal transmitted from the RU to be looped back by the jig, and check whether {MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} the transmitted signal returns.
  • Page 399 MT-242 14.7.3 Loopback Test - 1 14.7.4 Loopback Test - 2 Connect the jig (898Y0981) to the LAN cable connector. Remove the cover. - Upper right-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Connect the jig (898Y0981) to the CN6 on the CPU91A board. Perform the loopback test.
  • Page 400 MT-243 14.7.5 Loopback Test - 3 Connect the jig (898Y0981) to the LAN cable. u NOTE u If a hub is connected between the RU and jig, the loopback test cannot be performed. Perform the loopback test. {MT:14.7.2_Loopback Test Procedure} Remove the jig and then connect the LAN cable to the RU.
  • Page 401 MT-244 15. Troubleshooting Procedures for Quasi-data output from the LOG amp on the PMT17A/PMR17B board normal? {MU:5.3 [4-2-4]_PMT Virtual Read} Image Abnormalities 15.1 Vertical Streaks Quasi-data output from the LED lighting on the PMT17A/PMR17B board normal? {MU:5.3 [4-2-3]_LED Virtual Read} n Peculiar Events Return to the error code analysis flow.
  • Page 402 MT-245 Reseat the SCN17A/SCT17B board and check if the error occurs again. Replace the boards in the order named. 1. SCN17A/SCT17B board {MC:13.4_Scanner Board} 2. CPU91A board {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} Reseat the connector of the PMT17A/PMR17B board and check if the error occurs again. Replace the boards in the order named.
  • Page 403 MT-246 15.2 Horizontal Streaks 15.2.2 Troubleshooting Image Abnormalities Considered to be Caused by IP 15.2.1 Analysis Flow for Horizontal Streaks If an image abnormality occurs only with a specific IP or cassette, the image abnormality is considered to be caused by a defect of the IP. START n Analysis Flow Error code logged? START {MT:1.4.1_Checking the Error Log} Can the IP number or cassette number that causes image abnormality be identified?
  • Page 404 MT-247 15.2.3 Analyzing Pale Nonuniformity at the Leading Edge or n Checking the IP Size and Nonuniformity Occurrence Location Trailing Edge of the IP The nonuniformity occurrence location differs depending on the IP size. If a pale nonuniformity occurs at a fixed location on the leading-edge or trailing-edge side relative to the IP conveyance direction, the grip mechanism is considered to be IP contact position center during IP type IP size...
  • Page 405 MT-248 ■ Procedures for Checking the Grip Mechanism Execute Grip HP. Check the grip mechanism of the subscanning unit in accordance with the procedures described below, and remedy a problem, if any. Turn OFF the power of the machine. Turn OFF the high-voltage switch (S1) located on the SCN17A/SCT17B Repeat Grip HP several times to check the following points.
  • Page 406 MT-249 15.2.4 Analyzing Thin, Distinct Nonuniformity 15.2.5 Procedures for Checking the Grip Roller (Upper) If a thin, distinct nonuniformity occurs at a fixed location on the trailing-edge side n Check Procedures relative to the IP conveyance direction, the grip mechanism or FFM motor is considered to be faulty. With the machine placed in the power-OFF condition, perform the following procedures.
  • Page 407 MT-250 15.2.6 Procedures for Checking the Grounding of the PMT/ 15.2.7 Procedures for Checking the FFM Motor n Check Procedures n Check Procedures Check the grip mechanism of the subscanning unit, and, if anything abnormal is found, remedy it. With the machine placed in the power-OFF condition, perform the following procedures.
  • Page 408 MT-251 Drive the subscanning motor (MZ1). Repeat steps 7 through 9 to check the following points. If anything abnormal is found, replace the FFM motor. l RESULT-OK is displayed If an error code is displayed in the "OK" portion of RESULT-OK, then refer to the error code table and troubleshoot as appropriate.
  • Page 409 MT-252 15.3 Other Abnormal Images Quasi-data output from the LOG amp on the PMT17A/PMR17B board normal? {MU:5.3 [4-2-4]_PMT Virtual Read} n Peculiar Events - Does this image abnormality occur only with a specific cassette or IP? - Does this image abnormality occur when another machine is operating? Quasi-data output from the LED lighting on the PMT17A/PMR17B board normal? - Does this image abnormality occur depending o the processing size? {MU:5.3 [4-2-3]_LED Virtual Read} n Analysis Flow...
  • Page 410 MT-253 Photomultiplier (PMT/PMR) normal? {MT:13._Procedures for Checking the Scanner I/O} If not, troubleshoot as appropriate. Reseat the PMT17A/PMR17B board and check if the error occurs again. Replace the boards in the order named. 1. PMT17A/PMR17B board {MC:11.3_PMT17A/PMT23A/PMT26A/PMT27B Board} {MC:11.4_PMR17B/PMR23B/PMR26B/PMR27B Board} 2.
  • Page 411 MT-254 15.4 Countermeasure against Image 15.5 Countermeasure against Image Abnormalities Due to Laser Light Blocked Abnormality of White-Black-White under a Low Temperature If the following image abnormality is observed in the main scanning direction, it is considered to be caused by the discharge of static electricity accumulated on the If image abnormalities such as streaks are observed in the IP conveyance direction IP when the IP comes into contact with a shock-absorbing roller of the post-reading only in an image which is read immediately after the RU bootup under a low...
  • Page 412 MT-255 15.6 Countermeasure against Image Abnormalities like Annual Rings When image abnormality like annual rings is observed, it is considered to be caused by a problem in continuity on the PMT17A board or PMR17B board. Check the continuity both of the PMT17A board and the PMR17B board. Remove the PMT17A board and PMR17B board.
  • Page 413 MT-256 16. Removing the IP Rotate the IP jam processing handle of the feed/load conveyor unit until the leading edge of the IP can be checked. When an IP jam occurs, check the location where the IP is jammed, and perform appropriate removal procedures according to the occurrence location.
  • Page 414 MT-257 16.1.2 When the IP is Jammed in the Side-Positioning Rotate the IP jam processing handle to remove the IP. Conveyor Unit Remove the covers. - Lower front cover - Upper left-hand side cover - Lower left-hand side cover - Upper rear cover - Lower rear cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Manually convey the IP in the side-positioning conveyor unit toward...
  • Page 415 MT-258 Rotate the IP jam processing handle of the feed/load conveyor unit Rotate the IP jam processing handle to remove the IP. until the leading edge of the IP can be checked. Remove the guide at a position where the leading edge of the IP is visible.
  • Page 416 MT-259 16.2 Removing the IP from the Erasure Conveyor Open the guide of the IP switchback assembly. Unit u INSTRUCTION u Make sure that the guide of the IP switchback assembly is secured to the The IP that is jammed in the subscanning unit, post-reading conveyor unit, and housing by a magnet, before proceeding to the next step.
  • Page 417 MT-260 Manually convey the IP in the post-reading conveyor unit toward the Reinstall the guide in reverse order of step 4. erasure conveyor unit. Close the guide of the IP switchback assembly. u NOTE u Firmly secure the guide of the IP switchback assembly by the retainers. Otherwise, an IP jam might be caused.
  • Page 418 MT-261 16.2.2 When the IP is Jammed in the Erasure Conveyor Unit Open the guide of the IP switchback assembly. Remove the covers. - Lower front cover - Upper front light protect plate - Lower front light protect plate - Lower left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Rotate the belt of the erasure conveyor unit to convey the IP toward the IP switchback assembly.
  • Page 419 MT-262 Close the guide of the IP switchback assembly. u NOTE u Firmly secure the guide of the IP switchback assembly by the retainers. Otherwise, an IP jam might be caused. Reinstall the covers. - Lower front cover - Upper front light protect plate - Lower front light protect plate - Lower left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers}...
  • Page 420 MT-263 17. Block Diagrams 17.2 BCRA3, BCRA4, BCRC1, LED17A SNS17B PSU17A u NOTE u If serial number is # 50001 or later, some part of the block diagrams is different from the one described in this manual. For detailed information, ask “SERVICE ENGINEERING GROUP, QUALITY ASSURANCE DIV., MEDICAL SYSTEM BUSINESS DIV., HEALTHCARE BUSINESS HEADQUARTERS.”.
  • Page 421 MT-264 17.3 LCD17A, LDD12A, SYN12A, POL17A SCN17A/SCT17B PSU17A 136Y8795 CNZ31 光学部 灰 茶 +15AS +15A S 灰 赤 Scanning optics unit 灰 +15A S +15AS 灰 黄 839Y0057 緑 +15A S 灰 +15AS 灰 青 灰 紫 +15A S +15AS 灰...
  • Page 422 MT-265 17.4 Sensors (SA1 to SA12) PSU17A SNS17A SNS17B 136Y8737 136Y8789 CNA1 灰 灰 SUPSA2 SUPSA2 灰 灰 SINSA2H SINSA2H 灰 灰 146S0029 灰 灰 Cassette IN SUPSA3 カセッテIN検出 sensor 灰 灰 SINSA3H 灰 灰 灰 灰 SUPSA4 SUPSA3 136Y8781 灰...
  • Page 423 MT-266 17.5 Sensors (SA13 to SA24) PSU17A SNS17A SNS17B 6Y8741 6Y8791 CNA7 灰 灰 SA14 SUPSA2 SUPSA2 灰 灰 SINSA2H SINSA2H 灰 灰 146S0029 灰 灰 Cassette IN SUPSA3 カセッテIN検出 灰 灰 sensor SINSA3H 灰 灰 灰 灰 SA15 SUPSA4 SUPSA3 136Y8781 灰...
  • Page 424 MT-267 17.6 Sensors (SC1 to SC4, SG1 to SG2, SD1 to SD2, SE1 to SE2, SE4 to SE5) PSU17A 136Y8781 LINE LOAD 黒 白 (AC100V SNS17B AC240V) ブレーカ Circuit breaker 136N0418 136Y8780 136Y8794 136Y8757 CN12 CNC1 128N0067 Plug Inlet 灰 灰...
  • Page 425 MT-268 17.7 Sensors (SB1 to SB11) PSU17A SNS17B 136Y8781 LINE LOAD 黒 白 (AC100V AC240V) ブレーカ 136N0418 136Y8780 Circuit breaker 128N0067 Plug Inlet 黒 白 緑／黄のスパイラル CN10 136Y8793 136Y8754 GRN/YEL spiral CNB1 灰 灰 SUPSB1 SUPSB1 灰 灰 SINSB1H SINSB1H 緑／黄のスパイラル...
  • Page 426 MT-269 17.8 Sensors (SZ1 to SZ5) and FFM Motor (MZ1) PSU17A SNS17B CN17 136Y8794 136Y8769 CNZ1 灰 灰 SUPSZ2 SUPSZ2 SUPSZ2 灰 灰 SINSZ2H SINSZ2H 146S0029 灰 灰 駆動側ﾆｯﾌﾟ解除 Driving-side grip 灰 灰 SUPSZ3 release HP sensor HP検出 灰 灰 SINSZ3H 136Y8781 灰...
  • Page 427 MT-270 17.9 Motors (MA1 to MA4, MD1 to MD2, ME1, ME3, MZ2 to MZ3) PSU17A SNS17A DRV17A 136Y8785 CNG41 CNA21 赤 青 青 赤 MA1A MA1A 鼠 青 青 青 MA1B MA1B 青 青 黒 FUSE1 _MA1 136Y8781 FUSE1_MA1 B011 118SX167 鼠...
  • Page 428 MT-271 17.10 Motors (MB1 to MB3, MC1 to MC4, ME2, MZ4) PSU17A SNS17A DRV17B 赤 MB1A 青 CN31 MB1B CNB2 CN21 118SX167 CNG41 黒 136Y8781 FUSE7_MB1 青 青 MB1A 橙 橙 赤 白 IP搬送モータ 24V(B) FUSE7_MB1 青 青 (枚葉ターン部) LINE LOAD MB1B 橙...
  • Page 429 MT-272 17.11 Actuators (SOLA1 to SOLA4, PA1 to PA4, SVA1 to SVA4, CLA1 to CLA4) PSU17A DRV17A 136Y8796 136Y8747 CNA22 SOLA 1 青 青 赤 FUSE5_SOLA1 FUSE5_SOLA1 B051 青 青 黄 SOLA1DRV SOLA1DRV 107Y0169 SOLA1 カセッテホールド SOLA1PD 青 青 黒 SOLA1PD Cassette hold solenoid 青...
  • Page 430 MT-273 17.12 Actuator (SOLE1) PSU17A 136Y8798 136Y8775 CNG41 136Y8781 橙 橙 24V(B) LINE LOAD 橙 橙 GND(B) DRV17B-CN25 黒 橙 橙 24V(B) 白 (AC100V 橙 橙 GND(B) AC240 DRV17B ブレーカ Circuit breaker 136N0418 136Y8780 136Y8764 136Y8797 橙 橙 128N0067 5V(C) Plug Inlet 136Y8798...
  • Page 431 MT-274 17.13 Erasure Lamps and Fan 1 PSU17A INV17A 120Y0091 (消去ランプ) 136Y8782 136Y8782 136Y8781 136Y8779 136Y8766 白 L1-1 (Erasure lamp) CNG45 CNE41 白 LINE LOAD L1-2 橙 橙 橙 橙 LAMP1 24V(E) +24V_INV1 黒 橙 橙 橙 橙 GND(E) INV17A-CN1 PSU17A-CN2 GND_24VINV 白...
  • Page 432 MT-275 17.14 Erasure Lamps and Fan 2 PSU17A (消去ランプ) 136Y8781 (Erasure lamp) LINE LOAD 黒 白 (AC100V 橙 橙 24V(E) AC240V) ブレーカ 橙 橙 GND(E) 136N0418 136Y8780 Circuit breaker 128N0067 Plug Inlet 黒 INV17B 白 緑／黄のスパイラル GRN/YEL spiral SNS17B 120Y0091 緑／黄のスパイラル...
  • Page 433 MT-276 18. Board Test in MUTL Connector connected on the error-causing board snugly installed? Restore 18.1 Analysis Flow Reseat the error-causing board and check if the error occurs again. START Power OFF. Replace the error-causing board. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} {MC:13.3_IMG17A/B Board} Remove the upper right-hand side cover.
  • Page 434 MT-277 18.2 Board Test Locations to be checked for the board test are specified on each board. Carry out the board test and check those locations on the board, to ensure that the board is free from errors. l To check the all boards {MT:18.2.1_All Board} l To check the CPU board {MT:18.2.2_CPU Board} l To check the IMG board {MT:18.2.3_IMG Board} l To check the SCN/SCT board {MT:18.2.4_SCN/SCT Board}...
  • Page 435 MT-278 18.2.1 All Board l NO GOOD indication The MUTL reads “RESULT: XXXX” (XXXX: error code). Check the CPU, IMG, SCN/SCT, SNS/DRV and INV boards. If an error is detected during the board test, the error code corresponding to the Start the MUTL.
  • Page 436 MT-279 18.2.2 CPU Board Note the MUTL indication. l GOOD indication Check the CPU board. When the number of board tests is set to “1”, 6 “RESULT-OK” indications are Start the MUTL. displayed in MUTL. The meaning of each “RESULT-OK” corresponds as follows: {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
  • Page 437 MT-280 18.2.3 IMG Board Note the MUTL indication. l GOOD indication Check the IMG board. When the number of board tests is set to “1”, 3 “RESULT-OK” indications are Start the MUTL. displayed in MUTL. The meaning of each “RESULT-OK” corresponds as follows: {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
  • Page 438 MT-281 18.2.4 SCN/SCT Board Note the MUTL indication. l GOOD indication Check the SCN/SCT board. When the number of board tests is set to “1”, 4 “RESULT-OK” indications are Start the MUTL. displayed in MUTL. The meaning of each “RESULT-OK” corresponds as follows: {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
  • Page 439 MT-282 18.2.5 SNS/DRV Board Note the MUTL indication. l GOOD indication Check the SNS/DRV board. When the number of board tests is set to “1”, 8 “RESULT-OK” indications are Start the MUTL. displayed in MUTL. The meaning of each “RESULT-OK” corresponds as follows: {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
  • Page 440 MT-283 18.2.6 INV Board Note the MUTL indication. l GOOD indication Check the INV board. When the number of board tests is set to “1”, 3 “RESULT-OK” indications are Start the MUTL. displayed in MUTL. The meaning of each “RESULT-OK” corresponds as follows: {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} In the MUTL, set the number of board tests to be repeated.
  • Page 441 "CONFIGURATION" data. - HISTORY LOG - CONFIGURATION Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog opens, type ["C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\ RuPCTool.exe"] and click on the [OK] button. REFERENCE For details on the backup procedure, see under “23. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure”...
  • Page 442 MT-285 20. Troubleshooting Failures where DIP switch on the CPU91A board properly set? {MT:20.3_Checking the DIP SW Setting on the CPU91A Board} Error Code Is Undetectable and Machine does not Boot Up Restore If the error code is not displayed and the machine does not boot up, perform the Perform the procedures for restoring the RU application.
  • Page 443 MT-286 20.2 Checking the LEDs on the IMG Board and GOOD indication CPU Board If the LEDs flick up and down, or right and left, they are normal. The LEDs are mounted on the IMG17A/B board and CPU91A board to indicate that the boards are operating. If anything abnormal is found with the LED lighting status while the RU is powered ON, replace the IMG17A/B board or CPU91A board.
  • Page 444 MT-287 20.3 Checking the DIP SW Setting on the CPU91A Board 20.3.1 Checking the DIP SW Setting of the CR-IR 363 Check that the DipSW1 No. 7 switch on the CPU91A board is turned ON. MT-287 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 445 MT-288 20.4 Procedures for Restoring the RU Turn ON the power of the RU. The RU boots up to the following state. Application - The touch panel does not display anything and remains blank. u NOTES u - Only the cassette IN and OUT lamps are illuminated. - Once the procedures for restoring the RU application are performed, the machine Put the RU-Appl CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the CL.
  • Page 446 MT-289 Make sure that the IP address of the RU selected at step 6 is displayed, Turn OFF the power of the RU. and click on [OK]. Restore the DipSW1 No. 4 switch to its original setting. Reinstall the cover. - Upper right-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Turn ON the power of the RU.
  • Page 447 MT-290 Set the IP address of the RU. Set the IP address of the FTP server. u NOTE u u NOTE u Initializing the application resets the RU’s IP address setting for the RU to the Initializing the application resets the FTP server’s IP address setting for the RU to factory default.
  • Page 448 MT-291 u NOTE u Execute "Network Check". If the “VERSION UP” command cannot be executed in steps 16 through 21, execute the “INSTALL” command. The following screen appears when the “VERSION UP” command cannot be executed. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its version update, and click on [VERSION UP].
  • Page 449 MT-292 l When the version of the RU software installed in the flash ROM on the IMG Check "RU VERSION", and click on [OK]. board is 1.4 or later Confirm the installation precautions. CAUTIONS - While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of the RU.
  • Page 450 MT-293 When writing from the IMG17A/B board to the FLASH ROM is Check the version of the RU software. completed, press the [Enter] key. u NOTE u The following screen may fail to open due to an application error. If the following screen does not appear on the display, wait about 10 minutes after the click of [OK] in step 20, and then press the [Enter] key.
  • Page 451 MT-294 From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the IP address is to From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its data restore, and be set, and enter "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" of the CL. restore the "CONFIGURATION", "HISTORY LOG", and "SCN ALL DATA"...
  • Page 452 MT-295 Close the SetUp PC-TOOL. Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. Turn OFF the power of the RU. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. Turn ON the power of the RU. {MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence.
  • Page 453 MT-296 20.4.2 Touch Panel Calibration Procedures Touch the four [x] positions displayed on the LCD. u NOTE u After the procedures for restoring the RU application are performed, be sure to perform the touch panel calibration procedures to adjust the touch position. Otherwise, the error code “13032”...
  • Page 454 MT-297 Touch the [Return] button. Turn OFF the power of the RU. Turn ON the power of the RU. MT-297 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 455 MT-298 20.5 Checking the Connector Connections 20.6 Checking the LCD Panel Conduct the following connection checks: Check that the RU goes into the following state upon mechanical initialization. - Check that SNS17B board connector CN1 is tightly connected to SNS17A board l GOOD connector CN2.
  • Page 456 MT-299 20.7 Check of Cable Connection and Continuity Check for the continuity between the power source unit and the socket. {MT:20.7.4_Checking for Continuity of the Cables 1} n Phenomenon Turn ON the high-voltage switch. If the POWER lamp ( ) does not light up, the remote ON switch cannot be turned ON.
  • Page 457 MT-300 20.7.2 Checking the LED on the Power Supply Unit 20.7.3 Checking Connection of the IMG Board Connector Check to ensure that the 5VS LED on the power supply unit lights up when the RU Check to ensure that the connector is snugly connected to CN5 on the IMG17A/B breaker switch is turned ON.
  • Page 458 MT-301 20.7.4 Checking for Continuity of the Cables 1 20.7.5 Checking for Continuity of the Cables 2 Check for the continuity from the socket to the INPUT connector of the power supply Check for the continuity of the cable connecting CN1 on the rear of the LCD panel unit, and replace a part or component at the disconnected position.
  • Page 459 MT-302 20.7.6 Checking for Continuity of the Cables 3 Check for the continuity of the cable connecting CN1-5 pin on the power supply unit with the CN4-3 pin on the IMG17A/B board. If the continuity cannot be confirmed, replace the cable. Check for shorts between each of the pins and GND → 2Ω or greater Check for shorts between each of the pins →...
  • Page 460 MT-303 21. Troubleshooting Failures of New IP l Error pattern 2 The tip of the IP gets caught in the HR rubber guide, and the IP cannot reach SC3 (side positioning IP sensor), resulting in a timeout error. n Characteristic of Error - An error occurs only on a new IP of large width size (35x35 (cm)/14x14 (inch)) or half width (35x43 (cm)/14x17 (inch)).
  • Page 461 MT-304 22. Checking the Status of Each Unit l Normal procedure The cassette is inserted. 22.1 Checking the Cassette Set Unit The status of operation of the cassette set unit is checked to know where a failure occurs during the operation. After the location of the failure is determined, return to the analysis flow for troubleshooting.
  • Page 462 MT-305 REFERENCE The following displays appear if the status change of the cassette set unit sensors is When the IP returns to the checked by means of the monitoring function for operations of setting the cassette on cassette, the cassette hold a shelf on the first stage, reading the IP, and removing the cassette.
  • Page 463 MT-306 22.2 Checking the Erasure Conveyer Unit -1 22.2.1 Checking the Tab of the Timing Belt Wheel Check to ensure that the tabs of the timing belt wheels mounted on the five locations The erasure conveyer unit is checked on the following three points. indicated by the arrows are not broken. - Tab of timing belt wheel broken? {MT:22.2.1_Checking the Tab of the Timing Belt Wheel} - Housing and bearing drop from side plate? {MT:22.2.2_Checking the Housing and the Bearing}...
  • Page 464 MT-307 22.2.2 Checking the Housing and the Bearing 22.2.3 Checking the Tension Coil Spring Check the installation of the housing and the bearing from the bottom of the erasure Check to ensure that the tension coil spring mounted on the location indicated below conveyer unit.
  • Page 465 MT-308 22.3 Checking the Erasure Conveyer Unit -2 Check to ensure that the arm mounted on the location indicated in the figure below has been replaced with the part No.:341N1090C. Refer to the Check, Replacement and Adjustment of Parts Volume, “9.49 Branch Path Changeover Guide Driving Arm (Right)” for details of the replacement procedures of the arm.
  • Page 466 MT-309 22.4 Checking the Connector on the Scanner 22.5 Checking the Connector on the Scanning Board Optics Unit Check to ensure that there is no wobbling on the connector connected to the scanner Check to ensure that the connectors (CNZ31, SYN12A and POL12A) connected to board for transferring image data.
  • Page 467 MT-310 22.6 Checking the Connector Connection between the Boards Check the following connections to ensure that: - The IMG17A/B board-CN1 and the CPU91A board-CN2 are snugly connected. - The IMG17A/B board-CN2 and the scanner board-CN15 are snugly connected. MT-310 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 468 MT-311 BLANK PAGE MT-311 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 469 Appx MT-1 Appendix 1. Procedures for Restoring Procedures for Restoring the RU Application the Application by means of DIP SW-No.6 of the CAUTION CPU91A Board Check that the RU whose IP address is set to “172.16.1.10” is not connected on the network, before following the procedures below. If any connected, isolate the RU from the network by disconnecting the network cable or the like.
  • Page 470 Appx MT-2 Check the CL’s IP address and record it. Put the RU-Appl CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the CL. u NOTE u Perform the following procedures. The CL’s IP address must be restored to the user specified value after the RU u NOTE u application is initialized.
  • Page 471 Appx MT-3 Once the initialization of the application is completed, press the [Enter] Turn ON the power of the RU. key. REFERENCE The initialization of the application takes about 2 minutes. REFERENCES - It takes about three minutes until the screen appears on the touch panel after the RU is powered ON.
  • Page 472 Appx MT-4 Set the IP address of the RU. Set the IP address of the FTP server. u NOTE u u NOTE u Initializing the application resets the RU’s IP address setting for the RU to the Initializing the application resets the FTP server’s IP address setting for the RU to factory default.
  • Page 473 Appx MT-5 u NOTE u Execute "Network Check". If the “VERSION UP” command cannot be executed in steps 19 through 24, execute the “INSTALL” command. The following screen appears when the “VERSION UP” command cannot be executed. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its version update, and click on [VERSION UP].
  • Page 474 Appx MT-6 l When the version of the RU software installed in the flash ROM on the IMG Check "RU VERSION", and click on [OK]. board is 1.4 or later Confirm the installation precautions. CAUTIONS - While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of the RU.
  • Page 475 Appx MT-7 When writing from the IMG17A/B board to the FLASH ROM is Check the version of the RU software. completed, press the [Enter] key. u NOTE u The following screen may fail to open due to an application error. If the following screen does not appear on the display, wait about 10 minutes after the click of [OK] in step 20, and then press the [Enter] key.
  • Page 476 Appx MT-8 From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the IP address is to From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU for its data restore, and be set, and enter "IP ADDRESS" and "CL NAME" of the CL. restore the "CONFIGURATION", "HISTORY LOG", and "SCN ALL DATA"...
  • Page 477 Appx MT-9 Close the SetUp PC-TOOL. Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. Turn OFF the power of the RU. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. Turn ON the power of the RU. {MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence.
  • Page 478 Appx MT-10 Touch Panel Calibration Procedures Touch the four [x] positions displayed on the LCD. u NOTE u After the procedures for restoring the RU application are performed, be sure to perform the touch panel calibration procedures to adjust the touch position. Otherwise, the error code “13032”...
  • Page 479 Appx MT-11 Touch the [Return] button. Turn OFF the power of the RU. Turn ON the power of the RU. Appx MT-11 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-04 11.15.2004 FM4425...
  • Page 480 Appx MT-12 Appendix 2. Dimensions in the General Dimensions of the Conveyance Path Conveyance Path Rollers and Sensors Installed in the Conveyance Path The grip rollers and sensors in the conveyance path (corresponding to the conveyance sensor check of the MUTL) are located as shown below. Appx MT-12 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07...
  • Page 481 Appx MT-13 Dimensions of Members in the Conveyance Path Locations of such members that might cause damage on the IP during the conveyance are shown below. A numerical value in the figure refers to a distance from the reference plane to a member. Appx MT-13 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 482 Appx MT-14 Appx MT-14 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 483 Appx MT-15 Appx MT-15 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 484 Appx MT-16 Appx MT-16 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 485 Appx MT-17 Appx MT-17 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 486 Appx MT-18 Appx MT-18 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 487 Appx MT-19 BLANK PAGE Appx MT-19 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 488 Appx MT-20 BLANK PAGE Appx MT-20 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-07 09.30.2008 FM5340...
  • Page 489 Control Sheet Revision Pages affected Issue date Reason number 08.25.2003 New release (FM4098) All pages 10.10.2003 Corrections (FM4160) 6, 323-325 02.20.2004 Corrections (FM4148) 2-4, 6, 11, 19, 20, 24, 43, 55, 66.1, 66.2, 75, 126-129, 129.1, 129.2, 190, 191, CR-IR 363 Service Manual 194, 201, 206, 213, 218, 235, 241, 249, 250, 261, 267, 269, 271, 273-275, 275.1, 275.2, 284, 286, 296-298,...
  • Page 490 MC-1 Check/Adjustment Procedures for INSTRUCTION The yellow-painted screws require adjustments when components are reinstalled. Each Unit When reinstalling the components, follow the check/adjustment procedures. Precautions for Check, Replacement, and Adjustment NOTE - In this volume, descriptions are omitted regarding components that do not require The TP screw used to secure the ground wire is similar in shape to a DT screw.
  • Page 491 MC-2 Table of Contents Cassette Set Unit Cassette Set Unit MC-33 Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit MC-33 Removing the Cassette Set Unit MC-36 Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf) MC-38 Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Covers Covers MC-7 Third Shelves) MC-39 Covers...
  • Page 492 MC-3 Feed/Load Conveyor Feed/Load Conveyor Unit MC-88 6.28 Guide (Convergence Unit Lower Side) MC-127 Unit Feed/Load Conveyor Unit MC-88 6.29 Rubber Rollers (I, J, K, and L) MC-128 IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4) MC-90 6.30 Rubber Rollers (M and N) MC-129 Path Changeover Shelf Sensors (SB7, 8, 9) MC-90...
  • Page 493 MC-4 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit MC-189 9.24 Reflection Plate MC-243 Post-Reading Post-Reading Conveyor Unit MC-189 9.25 Timing Belt (A) MC-244 Conveyor Unit 8.1.1 Nothing MC-189 9.25.1 Removal Procedures MC-244 8.1.2 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit (For CR-IR 363) MC-195 9.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-245 9.26 Timing Belt (B) MC-247 8.1.2.1 Removal Procedures...
  • Page 494 MC-5 Scanning Optics Unit Scanning Optics Unit MC-298 Subscanning Unit Subscanning Unit MC-321 10.1 Nothing MC-298 12.1 Subscanning Unit MC-321 10.2 Scanning Optics Unit MC-302 12.2 Transparent Cover MC-325 10.2.1 Removal Procedures MC-302 12.3 Antistatic Member MC-325 10.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures MC-303 12.4 SUS Belt...
  • Page 495 MC-6 PC Boards PC Boards MC-365 Shading/Sensitivity Shading/Sensitivity Correction for 13.1 Board Bracket Assembly MC-365 Correction for IP IP Type HR and HR-BD MC-419 Type HR and HR-BD 13.2 CPU91A Board MC-367 18.1 Sensitivity Correction for 13.3 IMG17A/B Board MC-369 IP Type HR-BD (Both Side) MC-419 13.4...
  • Page 496 MC-7 Covers Covers {SP:INDEX}  Reinstallation Procedures  Removal Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Remove the covers. MC-7 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-01 08.25.2003 FM4098...
  • Page 497 MC-8 Filters {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Removal Procedures (#20001 or later) The heat-resistant louvers are attached to the following machines in the factory: CR-IR 363: With serial numbers of #22493 or later (except for #22507) Remove the filters.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
  • Page 498 MC-9  Removal Procedures (#50001 or later) Remove the filters.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-9 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 499 MC-10 Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf) {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the covers. - Upper front cover - Lower front cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf).  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. ...
  • Page 500 MC-11 Housing Unit Remove the power supply unit. Power Supply Unit (#20001 or Later) {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the covers. - Top cover - Lower front cover - Upper right-hand side cover - Lower left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Disconnect the connectors. {CHECK 1} MC-11 CR-IR 363 Service Manual...
  • Page 501 MC-12  Reinstallation Procedures u NOTE u To install the power supply unit,securely attach the ground wire to the PE mark. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-12 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 502 MC-13  Check/Adjustment Procedure l CHECK 1 After the power supply unit is replaced, check the voltage. If the checked voltage is not within the range of the power supply voltage inspection standard, adjust the voltage of the portion concerned according to the silk mentioned on the power supply unit.
  • Page 503 MC-14 Fan (Power Supply Unit) Circuit Breaker {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures (#20001 or Later) Remove the covers. Remove the covers. - Lower front cover - Lower front cover - Lower left-hand side cover - Lower left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the Fan.
  • Page 504 MC-15  Removal Procedures (#50001 or Later) Remove the FAST-ON terminal. u NOTE u Remove the covers. The FAST-ON terminal should be detached by pressing the shaded portion in the - Lower front cover illustration below. - Lower left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the bracket.
  • Page 505 MC-16  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the FAST-ON terminal. WARNING u NOTE u The FAST-ON terminal should be detached by pressing the shaded portion in the Before attaching the circuit breaker, place the breaker switch in the OFF illustration below. position. u NOTES u - Plug the FAST-ON terminals all the way in.
  • Page 506 MC-17 Socket Remove the FAST-ON terminal. u NOTE u {SP:INDEX} The FAST-ON terminal should be detached by pressing the shaded portion in the  Removal Procedures illustration below. Remove the cover. - Lower rear cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the bracket. Remove the socket. ...
  • Page 507 MC-18 Fans (FANG1 and FANG2) Remove the FANG1 and FANG2. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the covers. - Top cover - Upper right-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Disconnect the connectors.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedure l CHECK 1 Make sure that the FANG1 and FANG2 are attached in their correct orientations.
  • Page 508 MC-19 Fans (FANG3, FANG4, and FANG5)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Check/Adjustment Procedure  Removal Procedures l CHECK 1 Remove the cover. Make sure that the FANG3, FANG4, and FANG5 are attached in their correct - Upper right-hand side cover orientations.
  • Page 509 MC-20 Barcode Reader (BCRC1) Touch Panel Assembly (#20001 or Later) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the cover. Remove the covers. - Lower rear cover - Upper front cover - Upper right-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the BCRC1. Move the touch panel assembly away.
  • Page 510 MC-21  Exploded View Disconnect the cables and connectors. For the exploded view of the touch panel assembly, see the Service Parts List. {SP:11A_CONTROLLER 1 (#20001 or Later)}  Reinstallation Procedures u NOTE u Make sure that the flat cables are attached at their correct positions. Remove the touch panel assembly.
  • Page 511 MC-22  Check/Adjustment Procedure Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right After replacing the touch panel assembly, adjust the touch position of the touch panel. corners of the touch panel. Turn ON the power of the RU.
  • Page 512 MC-23 Touch the four [x] positions displayed on the LCD. Touch any area on the LCD at several positions. u NOTE u For the machines of #50001 and later, and #60001 and later, use an item with a thin tip that will not scratch the screen, like a touch panel pen, to touch the center points of [x].
  • Page 513 MC-24 Antistatic Member (Front) 4.10 Antistatic Members (Rear) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the erasure conveyor unit. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} Remove the antistatic member (front). Remove the antistatic members (rear). {SP:02A_FRAME 1} {SP:02B_FRAME 2 (#20001 or Later)} {SP:02C_FRAME 3 (#50001 or Later)}...
  • Page 514 MC-25 4.11 Side-Positioning Entrance IP Sensor (SG1) 4.12 "11x14IP" Determination Sensor (SG2) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Remove the SG1. Remove the SG2. ...
  • Page 515 MC-26 4.13 Cassette Hold Release Pin  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the cover. - Top cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Pull out the cassette set unit. {MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit} Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} Remove the cassette hold release pin.
  • Page 516 MC-27 4.14 Power Supply Assembly (#50001 or Later) Pull out the power supply unit and disconnect the connectors. u INSTRUCTION u {SP:INDEX} Due to the bracket on the back side of power supply unit and the bracket (stopper)  Removal Procedures on the housing unit, power supply unit does not fall when it is pulled out.
  • Page 517 MC-28  Reinstallation Procedures u NOTE u To install the power supply unit, securely attach the ground wire. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Measure the voltage in accordance with the table in “ l #50001 or Later and #60001 or Later”. {MT:8.2.2_Checking the Voltage on Test Pins} {MT:8.3.2_Checking the Voltage on Test Pins} {MT:8.5.2_Checking the Voltage on Test Pins}...
  • Page 518 MC-29 4.15 Power Supply Unit (#50001 or Later) Release the clamps, and remove the screws. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the Power Supply Assembly. {MC:4.14_Power Supply Assembly (#50001 or Later)} Release the clamp, and disconnect the connectors. Remove the screws, and remove the power supply unit. Remove the screw, and remove the grounding wire.
  • Page 519 MC-30 4.16 PSU29A Board (#50001 or Later) Remove the screws. {SP:INDEX} CAUTION When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. ...
  • Page 520 MC-31 4.17 Touch Panel Assembly (#50001 or Later Disconnect the cables and connectors. and #60001 or Later) {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the covers. - Upper front cover - Upper right-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Move the touch panel assembly away. Move back touch panel assembly to where it was.
  • Page 521 MC-32  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the touch panel assembly. u NOTE u Make sure that the flat cables are attached at their correct positions. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedure For the detailed procedure, refer to "CHECK/Adjustment Procedure" in "4.8 Touch Panel Assembly (#20001 or later)".
  • Page 522 MC-33 Cassette Set Unit Disconnect the connectors. Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit {SP:INDEX} CAUTION When pulling out or reinstalling the cassette set unit, be sure to remove the touch panel assembly before doing so.  Removal Procedures Remove the covers. - Upper front cover - Lower front cover - Upper right-hand side cover...
  • Page 523 MC-34  Reinstallation Procedures Move the cables away. u NOTE u To push the cassette set unit into the housing, get hold of the portions indicated in the illustration below. If other areas are grasped, portions of the cassette set unit may be damaged.
  • Page 524 MC-35  Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 6) MC-35 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 525 MC-36 Removing the Cassette Set Unit {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u Because the cassette set unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points when removing, installing, and moving it. - Before proceeding with the procedures, secure sufficient working space around the machine.
  • Page 526 MC-37  Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 2) MC-37 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 527 MC-38 Shutter Assembly (for the First Shelf) Remove the shutter assembly. u NOTE u {SP:INDEX} Put the disconnected cable and connector in an unobstructive corner beforehand  Removal Procedures to prevent them from being entangled. Remove the cover. - Upper front cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the touch panel assembly.
  • Page 528 MC-39 Shutter Assemblies (for the Second and Remove the shutter assembly. Third Shelves) u NOTE u Put the disconnected cable and connector in an unobstructive corner beforehand {SP:INDEX} to prevent them from being entangled. u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the shutter assemblies for the second and third shelves are the same, except removal/reinstallation procedures for their connector.
  • Page 529 MC-40 Shutter Assembly (for the Fourth Shelf) Arms (White) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the covers. Pull out the cassette set unit. - Upper front cover {MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit} - Lower front cover Remove the arms (white).
  • Page 530 MC-41 Shutters  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Check/Adjustment Procedures The replacement procedures for the shutters for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. l CHECK 1 Move the shutter to make sure that the sensor and shutter do not interfere with each ...
  • Page 531 MC-42 LEDs (for the First, Second, and Third Remove the LED. Shelves) {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the LEDs for the first, second, and third shelves are all identical.  Removal Procedures Remove the shutter assembly. INSTRUCTION Remove the shutter assembly for the shelf where the LED to be removed is installed.
  • Page 532 MC-43 LED (for the Fourth Shelf) 5.10 Antistatic Members {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Removal Procedures The replacement procedures for the antistatic members for the first, second, third, and Remove the shelf cover (for the fourth shelf). fourth shelves are all identical. {MC:3.3_Shelf Cover (for the Fourth Shelf)} ...
  • Page 533 MC-44 5.11 Suction Cup Driving Motors (MA1, 2, 3, 4)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Check/Adjustment Procedures The replacement procedures for the MA1, MA2, MA3, and MA4 are all identical. This section describes the replacement procedures for the MA1. l CHECK 1 Make sure that the MA1 is installed in its correct orientation.
  • Page 534 MC-45 5.12 Barcode Reader Assembly  Exploded View For the exploded view of the latch assembly (latch drive unit), see the Service Parts {SP:INDEX} List. u NOTE u {SP:03A_CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 (#20001 or Later)} The replacement procedures for the barcode reader assemblies for the first, second, {SP:03B_CASSETTE SET UNIT 2 (#50001 or Later)} third, and fourth shelves are all identical.
  • Page 535 MC-46 5.13 Exposure Markers Receiving Boxes 5.14 Hold Release Arm {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Removal Procedures The replacement procedures for the exposure markers receiving boxes for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. Pull out the cassette set unit. {MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit} ...
  • Page 536 MC-47 5.15 Hoses  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Check/Adjustment Procedures The replacement procedures for the hoses for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. l CHECK 1 To attach the hose, push it all the way. ...
  • Page 537 MC-48 5.16 Cassette Ejection Clutches (CLA1, 2, 3, 4)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Check/Adjustment Procedures The replacement procedures for the CLA1, CLA2, CLA3, and CLA4 are all identical. This section describes the replacement procedures for the CLA1. l CHECK 1 Make sure that the tab of the bracket engages with the U-shaped notch of the cassette ...
  • Page 538 MC-49 5.17 Cassette Ejection Sensors (SA1, 7, 13, 19) 5.18 Cassette Hold Sensors (SA3, 9, 15, 21) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the SA1, SA7, SA13, and SA19 are all identical. The replacement procedures for the SA3, SA9, SA15, and SA21 are all identical. This section describes the replacement procedures for the SA1.
  • Page 539 MC-50 5.19 Suction Cup HP Sensors (SA4, 10, 16, 22)  Reinstallation Procedures {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u u NOTE u Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly. The replacement procedures for the SA4, SA10, SA16, and SA22 are all identical. This section describes the replacement procedures for the SA4.
  • Page 540 MC-51 5.20 Suction Sensors (SA5, 11, 17, 23)  Reinstallation Procedures {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u u NOTE u Plug the FAST-ON terminals all the way in. The replacement procedures for the SA5, SA11, SA17, and SA23 are all identical. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. This section describes the replacement procedures for the SA5.
  • Page 541 MC-52 5.21 Suction Cup Assemblies Remove the suction cup assembly. u NOTE u {SP:INDEX} When installing or removing the suction cup assembly, perform the procedures u NOTE u while supporting the IP removal arm by hand. If you try to perform the procedures The replacement procedures for the suction cup assemblies for the first, second, third, without supporting the IP removal arm, the IP removal arm may be bent.
  • Page 542 MC-53 5.22 Suction Cups  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the suction cup assembly. l CHECK 1 {MC:5.21_Suction Cup Assemblies} When attaching the suction cups, make sure that metal powder scraped by the Remove the suction cups.
  • Page 543 MC-54 5.23 Roller Assemblies Remove the roller assemblies. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the roller assemblies for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical.  Removal Procedures Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.
  • Page 544 MC-55 5.24 Cassette Ejection Rollers Move the IP removal arms to the positions illustrated below. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the cassette ejection rollers for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical.  Removal Procedures Remove the shutter assembly.
  • Page 545 MC-56 Remove the brackets. Remove the cassette ejection roller (for the first shelf). Remove the planetary gear assembly.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-56 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 546 MC-57 5.25 Cassette Set Base Assemblies Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the cassette set base assemblies for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical.  Removal Procedures Remove the shutter assembly.
  • Page 547 MC-58  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the cassette set base assembly. u NOTE u Because you may get your hand pinched, do not perform the reinstallation procedures by grasping the lower front portion of the cassette set base assembly For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-58 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 548 MC-59 5.26 Stoppers 5.27 Inch/Metric Sensors (SA6, 12, 18, 24) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the stoppers for the first, second, third, and fourth The replacement procedures for the SA6, SA12, SA18, and SA24 are all identical. shelves are all identical.
  • Page 549 MC-60 5.28 Guide Plates  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Check/Adjustment Procedures The replacement procedures for the guide plates for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. l CHECK 1 Make sure that the latches of the guide plates are properly hooked into the bracket.
  • Page 550 MC-61 5.29 Cassette IN Sensors (SA2, 8, 14, 20)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Check/Adjustment Procedures The replacement procedures for the SA2, SA8, SA14, and SA20 are all identical. l CHECK 1 ...
  • Page 551 MC-62 5.30 Stoppers  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Check/Adjustment Procedures The replacement procedures for the stoppers for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. l CHECK 1 Make sure that the compression coil spring is attached properly. ...
  • Page 552 MC-63 5.31 Suction Pump Bracket Assemblies Disconnect the connector. {CHECK 1} {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u u NOTE u The FAST-ON terminal should be detached by pressing the shaded portion in the The replacement procedures for the suction pump bracket assemblies for the first, illustration below.
  • Page 553 MC-64  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the suction pump bracket assembly. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. u NOTE u Before removing the suction pump bracket assembly on the fourth shelf, remove the reinforcement bracket.  Check/Adjustment Procedures {MC:5.43_Reinforcement Bracket} l CHECK 1 Make sure that the FAST-ON terminals (SA5-1 and SA5-2) are attached in a proper position as illustrated below.
  • Page 554 MC-65 5.32 IP Removal Arms Remove the suction pump bracket assembly. INSTRUCTION {SP:INDEX} Remove the suction pump bracket assembly for the shelf where the IP removal u NOTE u arms to be removed is installed. The replacement procedures for the IP removal arms for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical.
  • Page 555 MC-66  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the IP removal arm. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 The right and left slide bearings should be attached in different orientations. Make sure that they are attached in their correct orientations. MC-66 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 556 MC-67 5.33 Bearings (IP Removal Link Shafts) Remove the KL clips. {CHECK 1} {SP:INDEX} NOTE u NOTE u A machine with a serial number of 21140 or earlier employs TP3x6 as a retaining The replacement procedures for the bearings (IP removal link shafts) for the first, screw of the gear attached to the IP removal link shaft.
  • Page 557 MC-68  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the bearings. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the bearings are attached in their correct positions. MC-68 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 558 MC-69 5.34 Solenoid Assemblies (SOLA1, 2, 3, 4)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Check/Adjustment Procedures The replacement procedures for the SOLA1, SOLA2, SOLA3, and SOLA4 are all identical. l CHECK 1 This section describes the replacement procedures for the SOLA1.
  • Page 559 MC-70 5.35 IP Leak Valves (SVA1, 2, 3, 4)  Removal Procedures (#50001 or Later) {SP:INDEX} Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. u NOTE u {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} The replacement procedures for the SVA1, SVA2, SVA3, and SVA4 are all identical. Remove the SVA1.
  • Page 560 MC-71 5.36 IP Suction Pumps (PA1, 2, 3, 4)  Removal Procedures (#50001 or Later) {SP:INDEX} Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. u NOTE u {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} The replacement procedures for the PA1, PA2, PA3, and PA4 are all identical. Remove the PA1.
  • Page 561 MC-72  Check/Adjustment Procedures (#20001 or Later)  Check/Adjustment Procedures (#50001 or Later) l CHECK 1 l CHECK 1 Make sure that the hose is attached in a proper position as illustrated below. Make sure that the hose is attached in a proper position as illustrated below. l CHECK 2 l CHECK 2 To attach the hose, push it all the way.
  • Page 562 MC-73 5.37 Cassette Hold Pins 5.38 Movable Guide Assemblies {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the cassette hold pins for the first, second, third, and The replacement procedures for the movable guide assemblies for the first, second, fourth shelves are all identical.
  • Page 563 MC-74 5.39 Movable Guides  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Check/Adjustment Procedures The replacement procedures for the movable guides for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. l CHECK 1 Make sure that the compression coil springs are properly attached between the ...
  • Page 564 MC-75 5.40 Tapes  Check/Adjustment Procedures {SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1 u NOTE u Attach the tape along the path illustrated below. The replacement procedures for the tapes for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical.  Removal Procedures Remove the IP removal arm.
  • Page 565 MC-76 5.41 Guides 5.42 IP Stoppers {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the guides for the first, second, third, and fourth The replacement procedures for the IP stoppers for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical.
  • Page 566 MC-77 5.43 Reinforcement Bracket Remove the reinforcement bracket. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Pull out the cassette set unit. {MC:5.1_Pulling Out the Cassette Set Unit} Move the arms (white) to the positions illustrated below.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-77 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 567 MC-78 5.44 Torsion Coil Springs {SP:INDEX} 5.44.1 Removal Procedures (Actuator: 366N0059A) For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the parts. l When the torsion coil spring on the third shelf is to be removed: l When the torsion coil spring on the first shelf is to be removed: Reference Part concerned...
  • Page 568 MC-79 Remove the screws, and remove the stopper. Carry out the operation of the procedure 5 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure. Push down the end of the actuator, check that orientations of the shaft end of the actuator and the notch on the bracket coincide with each other, and then raise up straight for removal.
  • Page 569 MC-80 5.44.2 Removal Procedures (Actuator: 366N0072B) For the preparation of the replacement of parts, remove the following parts concerned. Refer to the procedures mentioned as the reference, to remove the parts. l When the torsion coil spring on the third shelf is to be removed: l When the torsion coil spring on the first shelf is to be removed: Reference Part concerned...
  • Page 570 MC-81 Remove the screws, and remove the stopper. Carry out the operation of the procedure 5 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure. Push up the end of the actuator, check that orientations of the shaft end of the actuator and the notch on the bracket coincide with each other, and then raise up straight for removal.
  • Page 571 MC-82 5.44.3 Reinstallation Procedures (Actuator: 366N0059A) While holding the actuator as shown in the figure, push the torsion coil spring against the end surface of the bracket. While keeping the Reinstall the torsion coil spring on the actuator with the orientation torsion coil spring pushed, move the actuator forward. Align the shaft indicated in the figure below.
  • Page 572 MC-83 Check to make sure that the torsion coil spring is caught under the Reinstall the guide plate, and retain it with the screws. bracket. Manually move the actuator several times. Check to make sure that the actuator can move without being caught on the bracket. Reinstall the stopper, and retain it with the screws.
  • Page 573 MC-84 Reinstall the following parts concerned with the operation, and restore the machine. Reinstall the parts of interest according to the procedures mentioned as the reference. l When the torsion coil spring on the third shelf is attached: l When the torsion coil spring on the first shelf is attached: Reference Part concerned Reference Part concerned...
  • Page 574 MC-85 5.44.4 Reinstallation Procedures (Actuator: 366N0072B) Reinstall the actuator with the shaft end of the actuator aligning with the notch of the bracket in orientation, while holding the actuator as Remove the cassette IN sensor. shown in the figure. Reinstall the torsion coil spring on the actuator with the orientation indicated in the figure below.
  • Page 575 MC-86 Reinstall the cassette IN sensor while lifting the tip of the actuator. Reinstall the guide plate, and retain it with the screws. Check that the torsion coil spring hooks under the bracket. Check that the torsion coil spring holds the actuator. Reinstall the stopper, and retain it with the screws.
  • Page 576 MC-87 Reinstall the following parts concerned with the operation, and restore the machine. Reinstall the parts of interest according to the procedures mentioned as the reference. l When the torsion coil spring on the third shelf is attached: l When the torsion coil spring on the first shelf is attached: Reference Part concerned Reference Part concerned...
  • Page 577 MC-88 Feed/Load Conveyor Unit Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. Feed/Load Conveyor Unit {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u Because the feed/load conveyor unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points when removing, installing, and moving it. - Before proceeding with the procedures,secure sufficient working space around the machine.
  • Page 578 MC-89  Reinstallation Procedures Secure the feed/load conveyor unit in place. Mount the feed/load conveyor unit onto the housing. u NOTE u Use care so that the side plate bottom portions of the feed/load conveyor unit do not ride onto the brackets of the housing. Reinstall the covers.
  • Page 579 MC-90 IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4) Path Changeover Shelf Sensors (SB7, 8, 9) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the SB1, SB2, SB3, and SB4 are all identical. The replacement procedures for the SB7, SB8, and SB9 are all identical. This section describes the replacement procedures for the SB1.
  • Page 580 MC-91 Convergence Path Changeover Sensor Path Changeover HP Sensor (SB11) (SB10) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. Remove the SB11. {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} {SP:04C_FEED LOAD CONVEYOR 3} Remove the SB10.
  • Page 581 MC-92 IP Jam Handling Assembly Brush Roller Assembly {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. Remove the cover. - Upper rear cover {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the IP jam handling assembly. Remove the brush roller assembly. {CHECK 1} ...
  • Page 582 MC-93  Exploded View  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the brush roller assembly and brush rollers are attached in their correct orientations.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-93 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 583 MC-94 Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Remove the cam bracket assembly. Side) {SP:INDEX} 6.8.1 Removal Procedures Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} Carry out the operation of the step 3 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Release the clamp and disconnect the connector. MC-94 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 584 MC-95 6.8.2 Reinstallation Procedures Connect the connector and secure the clamp. Make sure that the half-clutch spur gear is secured by the rods of the bracket. Reinstall the feed/load conveyor unit. {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} Reinstall the cam bracket assembly. MC-95 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 585 MC-96 Path Changeover Mechanism Remove the cams. {SP:INDEX} 6.9.1 Removal Procedures Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side). {MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)} Rotate the cam until it orients as indicated in the figure below. u NOTE u If the cam has not been rotated to the orientation indicated in the figure below, the actuator and the sensor might possibly interfere with each other, resulting in the damage of the sensor.
  • Page 586 MC-97 6.9.2 Reinstallation Procedures Remove the ratchet head, the spur gear and the half-clutch spur gear. u NOTE u u NOTE u The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member 327Y0176C with countermeasures taken against a failure is marked in red on the pops out, push it back where it was.
  • Page 587 MC-98 Reinstall the cams. Verify the attachment location of the cam u NOTE u Check to ensure that the ratchet head and the protruding portion inside the cam are snugly attached at all of three portions. If the cam and the spur gear are mounted with their engagement lost even at one of the cogs, the path changeover mechanism does not work normally.
  • Page 588 MC-99 Rotate the cam until the actuator is viewed from the hole on the Make sure that the half-clutch spur gear is secured by the rods of the bracket, and verify the attachment location of the cam. bracket. Reinstall the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side). {MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)} MC-99 CR-IR 363 Service Manual...
  • Page 589 MC-100 6.10 Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Remove the bracket. Side) {SP:INDEX} 6.10.1 Removal Procedures Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 7 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Remove the bracket. Release the clamps and disconnect the connector.
  • Page 590 MC-101 Remove the cam and half-clutch spur gear. u NOTE u The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member pops out, push it back where it was. If the inner member is removed, it may cause trouble or failure.
  • Page 591 MC-102 6.10.2 Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the bracket. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 7 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Attach the screws. Reinstall the cam and half-clutch spur gear. u NOTE u The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member pops out, push it back where it was.
  • Page 592 MC-103 Reinstall the bracket. Connect the connector and secure the clamps. u NOTE u Rotate the cam in the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Align the half-clutch spur gear, the holes of the bracket and the rods of the bracket in position.
  • Page 593 MC-104 6.11 Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite- 6.12 Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite- Reference Side) Reference Side) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. Remove the feed/load conveyor unit. {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} {MC:6.1_Feed/Load Conveyor Unit} Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side).
  • Page 594 MC-105 6.13 Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-  Check/Adjustment Procedures Reference Side Gears) Attach the spur gears in accordance with the engravings on the side plate. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side). {MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)} Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side).
  • Page 595 MC-106 6.14 Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5) 6.15 Pre-Convergence IP Sensor (SB6) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side) Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side) {MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)} {MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)} Remove the SB5.
  • Page 596 MC-107 6.16 IP Transport Motor (MB1) Remove the MB1. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the gears bracing bracket (upper opposite-reference side). {MC:6.11_Gears Bracing Bracket (Upper Opposite-Reference Side)} Put the feed/load conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
  • Page 597 MC-108 6.17 Convergence Unit IP Transport Motor (MB2)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side). l CHECK 1 {MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)} Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
  • Page 598 MC-109 6.18 Convergence Path Changeover Guide  Reinstallation Procedures Driving Motor (MB3) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Check/Adjustment Procedures  Removal Procedures l CHECK 1 Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side) Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation. {MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)} {MC:6.13_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite-Reference Side Gears)_ ■ Check/Adjustment Procedures}...
  • Page 599 MC-110 6.19 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the 6.20 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly (for the First, Second, and Third Shelves) Fourth Shelf) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u  Removal Procedures The replacement procedures for the shock-absorbing roller assemblies for the first, second, and third shelves are all identical. Remove the MB1.
  • Page 600 MC-111 6.21 Antistatic Members 6.22 Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence Unit) {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u {SP:INDEX} The replacement procedures for the antistatic members for the first, second, third, and u NOTE u fourth shelves are all identical. The following two kinds of shock-absorbing rollers are attached to the machine. - Lone shock-absorbing roller ...
  • Page 601 MC-112 6.23 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H) Carry out the operation of the step 4 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the rubber rollers A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H are all identical.
  • Page 602 MC-113 Remove the spur gear and tension coil spring. Carry out the operations of the steps 10 and 11 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. u INSTRUCTION u The spur gear to be removed depends on the removed rubber roller. Remove the spur gear mounted forward to the tension coil spring. Rotate the housing until the orientation indicated in the figure below is reached, and then remove it.
  • Page 603 MC-114 6.23.2 Reinstallation Procedures Carry out the operations of the steps 13 and 14 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 5 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Move the rubber roller (A) inward, and then remove it. Insert one of ends of the rubber roller (B) into the side plate.
  • Page 604 MC-115 Insert one of ends of the rubber roller (A) into the side plate. Carry out the operations of the steps 7 and 8 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. u NOTE u Pay attention to the attachment orientation of the rubber roller. Align the housing with the hole on the side plate in orientation, and then reinstall it.
  • Page 605 MC-116 Carry out the operations in the steps 10 to 12 from the direction Attach the spur gears and tension coil spring. indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Align the housing with the hole on the side plate in orientation, and then reinstall it. Align the housing with the hole on the side plate in orientation, and then reinstall it.
  • Page 606 MC-117 Carry out the operation of the step 14 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Attach the tension coil spring and spur gear. u NOTE u The orientation of attaching the spur gear differs depending on the location to be attached.
  • Page 607 MC-118 6.24 Arm and Bearing (for the First Shelf) Remove the bearing. {SP:INDEX} 6.24.1 Removal Procedures Remove the SB1. {MC:6.2_IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4)} Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly (for the first shelf). {MC:6.19_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assemblies (for the First, Second, and Third Shelves)} Remove the rubber rollers (A and B). {MC:6.23_Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H)} Remove the spur gear, tension coil spring, and arm.
  • Page 608 MC-119 6.24.2 Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the arm. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 4 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Reinstall the bearing. Reinstall the tension coil spring and spur gear. Reinstall the rubber rollers (A and B). {MC:6.23_Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H)} Reinstall the shock-absorbing roller assembly (for the first shelf).
  • Page 609 MC-120 6.25 Arms and Bearings (for the Second, Third, Carry out the operations in the steps 6 and 7 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. and Fourth Shelves) {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the arms and bearings for the second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical.
  • Page 610 MC-121 6.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the spur gear and bearing. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Reinstall the arm and tension coil spring. Reinstall the rubber rollers. u INSTRUCTION u Install the rubber roller for the shelf where the mounted arm and bearing are installed.
  • Page 611 MC-122 Reinstall the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side). {MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)} Reinstall the IP feed/load sensor. u INSTRUCTION u Install the IP feed/load sensor (cassette side) for the shelf where the mounted arm and bearing are installed. {MC:6.2_IP Feed/Load Sensors (SB1, 2, 3, 4)} MC-122 CR-IR 363 Service Manual...
  • Page 612 MC-123 6.26 Path Changeover Guides (for the First,  Reinstallation Procedures Second, Third, and Fourth Shelves) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the path changeover guides for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. ...
  • Page 613 MC-124 6.27 Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and Remove the screws. Fourth Shelves) {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the guide for the first, second, third, and fourth shelves are all identical. 6.27.1 Removal Procedures Remove the path changeover guide assembly. u INSTRUCTION u Remove the path changeover guide for the shelf where the guide to be removed Carry out the operations in the steps 6 and 7 from the direction...
  • Page 614 MC-125 6.27.2 Reinstallation Procedures Raise the guide straight up and remove it. u NOTE u Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Raise the guide straight up while keeping clear of the half punches inside the side plate to remove it.
  • Page 615 MC-126 Flip down the guide forward, and check to ensure that the guide is Reinstall the screws. mounted on the half punch. Reinstall the path changeover guide assembly. u INSTRUCTION u Install the path changeover guide for the shelf of the mounted guide. Carry out the operations of the steps 5 and 6 from the direction {MC:6.26_Path Changeover Guides (for the First, Second, Third, and Fourth indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 616 MC-127 6.28 Guide (Convergence Unit Lower Side) Remove the guide (convergence unit lower side). {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side). {MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)} Remove the SB6. {MC:6.15_Pre-Convergence IP Sensor (SB6)} Remove the shock-absorbing rollers (convergence unit). {MC:6.22_Shock-Absorbing Rollers (Convergence Unit).} Remove the bracket.
  • Page 617 MC-128 6.29 Rubber Rollers (I, J, K, and L) Remove the guide and spur gear. {CHECK 1} {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u The replacement procedures for the rubber rollers I, J, K, and L are all identical. This section describes the replacement procedures for the rubber rollers I and J. ...
  • Page 618 MC-129 6.30 Rubber Rollers (M and N) Remove the rubber rollers (I and J). {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Rubber Rollers  Removal Procedures Remove the IP jam handling assembly.  Reinstallation Procedures {MC:6.6_IP Jam Handling Assembly} u NOTE u Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side). The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached.
  • Page 619 MC-130  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the guide and spur gears. u NOTE u The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached. Pay attention to their attachment locations. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
  • Page 620 MC-131 6.31 Rubber Rollers (O and P) Remove the guide and spur gear. {CHECK 1} {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Rubber Rollers Remove the rubber rollers (O and P).  Removal Procedures Remove the IP jam handling assembly. {MC:6.6_IP Jam Handling Assembly} Remove the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side).
  • Page 621 MC-132 6.32 Rubber Rollers (Q and R)  Reinstallation Procedures u NOTE u {SP:INDEX} The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached.  Locations of Rubber Rollers Pay attention to their attachment locations. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. ...
  • Page 622 MC-133  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the guides and spur gears. u NOTE u The rubber rollers differ in length and shape depending on where they are attached. Pay attention to their attachment locations. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the spur gear is attached at its correct orientation.
  • Page 623 MC-134 6.33 Convergence Path Changeover Guide  Removal Procedures {SP:INDEX} Remove the cam bracket assembly (lower reference side) u NOTE u {MC:6.10_Cam Bracket Assembly (Lower Reference Side)} The following three kinds of guides are attached to the machine. Remove the gears bracing bracket (lower opposite-reference side). - Old-model guide (363Y0465/A) {MC:6.12_Gears Bracing Bracket (Lower Opposite-Reference Side)} - Old-model guide (363Y0465/A) + Anti-jam spacer (347N100005)
  • Page 624 MC-135  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the spacer. {CHECK 1} l CHECK 1 Make sure that the spacer is attached correctly. Remove the convergence path changeover guide. l CHECK 2 {CHECK 2} The convergence path changeover guide should be installed in an orientation illustrated below.
  • Page 625 MC-136 6.34 Rubber Rollers (S and T) Remove the rubber rollers (S and T). {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Rubber Rollers  Removal Procedures Remove the brush roller assembly. {MC:6.7_Brush Roller Assembly} Remove the convergence path changeover guide. {MC:6.33_Convergence Path Changeover Guide} ...
  • Page 626 MC-137 6.35 Guide (Convergence Unit Upper Side)  Reinstallation Procedures {SP:INDEX} Reinstall the guide.  Removal Procedures Remove the SB5. {MC:6.14_Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5)} Remove the rubber rollers (Q and R). {MC:6.32_Rubber Rollers (Q and R)} Remove the convergence path changeover guide. {MC:6.33_Convergence Path Changeover Guide} Remove the guide (convergence unit upper side).
  • Page 627 MC-138 Reinstall the convergence path changeover guide. {MC:6.33_Convergence Path Changeover Guide} Reinstall the rubber rollers (Q and R). {MC:6.32_Rubber Rollers (Q and R)} Reinstall the SB5. {MC:6.14_Pre-BCR IP Sensor (SB5)} MC-138 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 628 MC-139 6.36 Half-Clutch Spur Gear (Upper Reference Remove the half-clutch spur gear and cam. Side) u NOTE u The inner member of the half-clutch spur gear may pop out. If the inner member {SP:INDEX} pops out, push it back where it was. If the inner member is removed, it may cause trouble or failure.
  • Page 629 MC-140 6.36.2 Reinstallation Procedures Verify the attachment location of the cam Verify the attachment location of the cam u NOTE u Check to ensure that the ratchet head and the protruding portion inside the cam are snugly attached at all of three portions. If the cam and the spur gear are mounted with their engagement lost even at one of the cogs, the path changeover mechanism does not work normally.
  • Page 630 MC-141 Rotate the cam until the actuator is viewed from the hole on the Make sure that the half-clutch spur gear is secured by the rods of the bracket, and verify the attachment location of the cam. bracket. Reinstall the cam bracket assembly (upper reference side). {MC:6.8_Cam Bracket Assembly (Upper Reference Side)} MC-141 CR-IR 363 Service Manual...
  • Page 631 MC-142 Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit Disconnect the connector. Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit {SP:INDEX} 7.1.1 Removal Procedures Remove the covers. - Lower front cover - Lower right-hand side cover - Lower left-hand side cover - Lower rear cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Carry out the operations in the steps 3 and 4 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 632 MC-143 Carry out the operations in the steps 6 to 8 from the direction Remove the screws. indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Disconnect the connector. Carry out the operations in the step 10 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Disconnect the connectors. Disconnect the connector. MC-143 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 633 MC-144 Carry out the operations in the steps 12 and 13 from the direction Pull out and remove the side-positioning conveyer unit. indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Slightly lift the side-positioning conveyer unit and flip it down forward. u NOTE u Exercise care not to bring the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit into contact with the ceiling of the housing (shadowed portion in the figure) when slightly lifting the side-positioning conveyer unit and flipping it down forward.
  • Page 634 MC-145 7.1.2 Reinstallation Procedures Push in the lower portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit horizontally. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 4 from the direction u NOTE u indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Push the side-positioning conveyer unit horizontally without lifting it. Otherwise, the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit might come into contact with the ceiling of the housing, resulting in deformation or damage of the guide of the side-positioning conveyer unit.
  • Page 635 MC-146 Push in the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit Carry out the operations in the step 6 from the direction indicated by horizontally. the arrow in the figure below. u NOTE u Push the side-positioning conveyer unit horizontally without lifting it. Otherwise, the upper portion of the side-positioning conveyer unit might come into contact with the ceiling of the housing, resulting in deformation or damage of the guide of the side-positioning conveyer unit.
  • Page 636 MC-147 Carry out the operations in the steps 8 to 10 from the direction Connect the connectors. indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Carry out the operations in the steps 12 and 13 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Connect the connector. Attach the screws. Attach the screws. MC-147 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 637 MC-148 Connect the connector. Reinstall the covers. - Lower front cover - Lower right-hand side cover - Lower left-hand side cover - Lower rear cover {MC:3.1_Covers} MC-148 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 638 MC-149 Side-Positioning Mechanism HP Sensor Spur Gears (Reference Side) (SC1) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Remove the cover. - Lower rear cover Remove the bracket. {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the SC1. {SP:05E_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 (#20001 or Later)} {SP:05F_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 6 (#50001 or Later)} ...
  • Page 639 MC-150 Grip Release HP Sensor (SC2) Move the actuator as appropriate. u NOTE u {SP:INDEX} The spur gears should be removed or installed under condition where the  Removal Procedures actuator does not interfere with the SC2. Otherwise, the SC2 might be damaged. Remove the spur gears.
  • Page 640 MC-151 Side-Positioning IP Sensor (SC3) Cleaning Guide HP Sensor (SC4) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. Remove the covers. - Lower front cover {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} - Lower right-hand side cover Remove the SC3. {MC:3.1_Covers} {SP:05B_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2} Remove the SC4.
  • Page 641 MC-152 Timing Belt  Check/Adjustment Procedures {SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1 Attach the timing belt along to route indicate below.  Removal Procedures Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Remove the timing belt.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-152 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 642 MC-153 Side-Positioning Motor (MC1) Remove the MC1. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as illustrated below.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. ...
  • Page 643 MC-154 Grip Release Motor (MC2)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Check/Adjustment Procedures  Removal Procedures l CHECK 1 Remove the spur gears (reference side). Make sure that the MC2 is installed in such an orientation as illustrated below. {MC:7.3_Spur Gears (Reference Side)} Remove the MC1.
  • Page 644 MC-155 7.10 IP Transport Motor (MC3) Remove the MC3. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Remove the timing belt. {MC:7.7_Timing Belt} Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as illustrated below. ...
  • Page 645 MC-156 7.11 Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC4) Remove the MC4. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Remove the cleaning guide driving motor assembly.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the MC4 is installed in such an orientation as illustrated below.
  • Page 646 MC-157 7.12 Latch Drive Unit (Overall) Remove the latch drive unit (overall). {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the MC2. {MC:7.9_Grip Release Motor (MC2)} Remove the MC3. {MC:7.10_IP Transport Motor (MC3)} Disconnect the connectors and cables. Move the latch assembly to such a position as illustrated below. MC-157 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 647 MC-158  Reinstallation Procedures Move the latch assembly to its home position. Move the latch assembly to such a position as illustrated below. Reinstall the latch drive unit (overall). Mount the latch drive unit (overall) onto the side-positioning conveyor unit. MC-158 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 648 MC-159 7.13 Latch Assembly (Latch Driver)  Exploded View For the exploded view of the latch assembly (latch drive unit), see the Service Parts {SP:INDEX} List.  Removal Procedures {SP:05E_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 5 (#20001 or Later)} {SP:05F_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 6 (#50001 or Later)} Remove the latch drive unit (overall).
  • Page 649 MC-160 7.14 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) Remove the latch assembly (reference side). {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the spur gears (reference side). {MC:7.3_Spur Gears (Reference Side)} Move the latch assembly (reference side) to its home position.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. ...
  • Page 650 MC-161 7.15 Tensioner 7.16 Planetary Gear Assembly {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the timing belt. Remove the timing belt. {MC:7.7_Timing Belt} {MC:7.7_Timing Belt} Remove the tensioner. Remove the planetary gear assembly. {SP:05C_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3} {SP:05C_SIDE-POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3} ...
  • Page 651 MC-162 7.17 Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side) 7.18 Antistatic Members {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the planetary gear assembly. Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.16_Planetary Gear Assembly} {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Remove the spur gear (opposite reference side). Remove the antistatic members.
  • Page 652 MC-163 7.19 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)  Reinstallation Procedures {SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u The cams differ in shape depending on where they are attached. When attaching the  Removal Procedures cams, use care not to confuse their attachment locations and orientations. Remove the spur gears.
  • Page 653 MC-164 7.20 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)  Reinstallation Procedures {SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u The cams differ in shape depending on where they are attached. When attaching the  Removal Procedures cams, use care not to confuse their attachment locations and orientations. Remove the tensioner.
  • Page 654 MC-165 7.21 Grip Shaft 7.22 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.19_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side). Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly.
  • Page 655 MC-166 7.23 Rubber Roller (A) Remove the rubber roller (A). {SP:INDEX}  Rubber Roller Locations  Removal Procedures Remove the spur gear (opposite reference side). {MC:7.17_Spur Gear (Opposite Reference Side)} Remove the guide. u NOTE u The guide removed should not be placed with its IP contacting face down. Otherwise, the contacting face might be scratched or soiled.
  • Page 656 MC-167 7.24 Rubber Roller (B) Remove the rubber roller (B). u NOTE u {SP:INDEX} The guide removed should not be placed with its IP contacting face down.  Rubber Roller Locations Otherwise, the contacting face might be scratched or soiled. ...
  • Page 657 MC-168 7.25 Rubber Rollers (C and D)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Rubber Roller Locations  Check/Adjustment Procedures CHECK 1 The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make sure that the tension coil springs are attached in their correct locations.
  • Page 658 MC-169  Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4) {CHECK 1} MC-169 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 659 MC-170 7.26 Rubber Roller (E) Remove the rubber roller (E). u INSTRUCTION u {SP:INDEX} The rubber roller (E) removal step varies with the serial number of the machine.  Rubber Roller Locations Confirm the serial number and then perform the associated procedure. - #20004, #20030, #20034, #20046 to 20048, #20058, #20060, #20063, #20068, #20071, #20073, #20088, #20090, #20097, #20112 or later {■ Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4-a)}...
  • Page 660 MC-171  Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4-a) {CHECK 1} MC-171 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 661 MC-172  Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4-b) {CHECK 1} MC-172 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 662 MC-173 7.27 Rubber Roller (F) Remove the rubber roller (F). u INSTRUCTION u {SP:INDEX} The rubber roller (F) removal step varies with the serial number of the machine.  Rubber Roller Locations Confirm the serial number and then perform the associated procedure. - #20004, #20030, #20034, #20046 to 20048, #20058, #20060, #20063, #20068, #20071, #20073, #20088, #20090, #20097, #20112 or later {■ Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4-a)}...
  • Page 663 MC-174  Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4-a) {CHECK 1} MC-174 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 664 MC-175  Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4-b) {CHECK 1} MC-175 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 665 MC-176 7.28 Guide Remove the guide. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the rubber rollers (C and D). {MC:7.25_Rubber Roller (C and D)} Remove the rubber roller (E). {MC:7.26_Rubber Roller (E)}  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-176 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 666 MC-177 7.29 Cleaning Guide Assembly Remove the cleaning guide assembly. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Remove the guide. u NOTE u The guide removed should not be placed with its IP contacting face down. Otherwise, the contacting face might be scratched or soiled.
  • Page 667 MC-178  Reinstallation Procedures Secure the cleaning guide assembly and guide in place. Mount the cleaning guide assembly onto the side-positioning conveyor unit. Connect the connector. Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} MC-178 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 668 MC-179 7.30 Cleaning Guide Remove the cleaning guide. {CHECK 1} {SP:INDEX} {CHECK 2}  Removal Procedures Remove the MC4. {MC:7.11_Cleaning Guide Driving Motor (MC4)} Remove the cleaning guide assembly. {MC:7.29_Cleaning Guide Assembly} MC-179 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 669 MC-180  Reinstallation Procedures CHECK 2 Make sure that the tension coil spring is attached properly. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures CHECK 1 Make sure that the cleaning guide is installed in its correct orientation. MC-180 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 670 MC-181 7.31 Tape REFERENCE When the spur gear is rotated, the latch assembly moves inward. Otherwise, the {SP:INDEX} tape cannot be applied as the latch is in its way. 7.31.1 Removal Procedures Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Carry out the operation of the step 3 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 671 MC-182 Carry out the operations in the steps 6 and 7 from the direction Remove the antistatic brush assembly. indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Remove the screw. Carry out the operations in the steps 10 and 11 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Remove the screw. Remove the screw.
  • Page 672 MC-183 Remove the screw. Remove the tape. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly. Carry out the operation of the step 14 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. MC-183 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 673 MC-184 7.31.2 Reinstallation Procedures Apply the tape. u NOTES u Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 9 from the direction - Apply the tape on the position where the end surface of the guide is not viewed indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 674 MC-185 Apply the tape to the rear of the guide. Check the distance between the rubber end to the tape end. u NOTE u u NOTE u Apply carefully not to leave air bubbles between the tape and the guide. Measure a distance from the rubber end to the tape end.
  • Page 675 MC-186 Apply the tape to the rear of the guide. Attach the screw. u NOTE u Apply carefully not to leave air bubbles between the tape and the guide. Attach the screw. Reinstall the shock-absorbing roller assembly. Reinstall the antistatic brush assembly. MC-186 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 676 MC-187 Carry out the operations in the steps 15 and 16 from the direction Lay down the side-positioning conveyor unit in such an orientation as indicated by the arrow in the figure below. illustrated below. Secure the screw. Carry out the operations in the step 19 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 677 MC-188 Rotate the spur gear fully counterclockwise. REFERENCE By rotating the spur gear fully counterclockwise, the latch assembly restores to its home position. Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} MC-188 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 678 MC-189 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit Post-Reading Conveyor Unit {SP:INDEX} 8.1.1 Nothing MC-189 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 679 MC-190 BLANK PAGE MC-190 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 680 MC-191 BLANK PAGE MC-191 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 681 MC-192 BLANK PAGE MC-192 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 682 MC-193 BLANK PAGE MC-193 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 683 MC-194 BLANK PAGE MC-194 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 684 MC-195 8.1.2 Post-Reading Conveyor Unit (For CR-IR 363) Remove the screws. 8.1.2.1 Removal Procedures Remove the lower light-collecting guide. {MC:11.2_Lower Light-Collecting Guide} Carry out the operations in the steps 3 and 4 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Carry out the operations in the steps 6 and 7 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 685 MC-196 Remove the screws. Slightly lift the post-reading conveyor unit and flip it down forward. u NOTE u Exercise care not to bring the upper portion of the post-reading conveyor unit into contact with the ceiling of the housing (shadowed portion in the figure) when slightly lifting the post-reading conveyor unit and flipping it down forward. The guide of the post-reading conveyor unit might possibly deform or get damaged.
  • Page 686 MC-197 8.1.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures Raise up the upper portion of the post-reading conveyor unit, and push it into the subscanning unit. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction u NOTE u indicated by the arrow in the figure below. - Exercise care not to bring the upper portion of the post-reading conveyor unit into contact with the ceiling of the housing (shadowed portion in the figure) when raising up the pos-treading conveyor unit.
  • Page 687 MC-198 Carry out the operations of the steps 5 and 6 from the direction Carry out the operations of the steps 8 and 9 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Secure the screws. Secure the screws. Connect the connector. Connect the connector. MC-198 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 688 MC-199 Reinstall the lower light-collecting guide. {MC:11.2_Lower Light-Collecting Guide} MC-199 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 689 MC-200 Tensioner Assembly Timing Belt {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} Remove the tensioner assembly. Remove the timing belt.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
  • Page 690 MC-201 Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side) Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side). {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} Remove the bracket.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Before attaching the spur gears, make sure that the positions of the actuator and sensor are such that they do not interfere with each other.
  • Page 691 MC-202 Grip Release HP Sensor (SD1) Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side). Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side). {MC:8.4_Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side)} {MC:8.4_Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side)} Remove the SD1.
  • Page 692 MC-203 Planetary Gear Assembly Remove the planetary gear assembly. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the timing belt. {MC:8.3_Timing Belt} Remove the bracket.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 The planetary gear assembly should be attached with its orientation in mind. MC-203 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 693 MC-204 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) Grip Release Motor (MD1) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the planetary gear assembly. Remove the spur gears (opposite reference side). {MC:8.7_Planetary Gear Assembly} {MC:8.4_Spur Gears (Opposite Reference Side)} Remove the grip arm (opposite reference side). Remove the MD1.
  • Page 694 MC-205 8.10 Post-Reading Conveyance IP Sensor (SD2) 8.11 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} Remove the SD2. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly. ...
  • Page 695 MC-206 8.12 Spur Gears (Reference Side) 8.13 IP Transport Motor (MD2) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. Remove the planetary gear assembly. {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} {MC:8.7_Planetary Gear Assembly} Put the post-reading conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below. Remove the spur gears (reference side).
  • Page 696 MC-207 8.14 Variable Guide Assembly  Exploded View {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} Remove the variable guide assembly. MC-207 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 697 MC-208  Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the variable guide assembly. Reinstall the post-reading conveyor unit. {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} MC-208 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 698 MC-209 8.15 Rubber Rollers (A and B)  Check/Adjustment Procedures {SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1 The rubber rollers (A) and (B) differ in length. Pay attention to their attachment  Locations of Rubber Rollers locations. l CHECK 2 The tension coil springs differ in length depending on whether they are attached. Make sure that the tension coil springs are attached at their correct positions.
  • Page 699 MC-210  Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4) {CHECK 1} {CHECK 2} MC-210 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 700 MC-211 8.16 Rubber Rollers (C and D)  Check/Adjustment Procedures {SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1 The rubber rollers (C) and (D) differ in length. Pay attention to their attachment  Locations of Rubber Rollers locations.  Removal Procedures Remove the variable guide assembly. {MC:8.14_Variable Guide Assembly} Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
  • Page 701 MC-212  Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4) {CHECK 1} MC-212 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 702 MC-213 8.17 Rubber Rollers (E and F) Remove the rubber rollers (E and F). {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Rubber Rollers  Removal Procedures Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} Remove the spur gears. {MC:8.12_Spur Gears (Reference Side)} Put the post-reading conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below. ...
  • Page 703 MC-214 8.18 Rubber Rollers (G and H) Remove the rubber rollers (G and H). {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Rubber Rollers  Removal Procedures Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} Remove the spur gears. {MC:8.12_Spur Gears (Reference Side)} Put the post-reading conveyor unit in an orientation illustrated below. ...
  • Page 704 MC-215 8.19 Guide (A) Remove the guide (A). {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Guides  Removal Procedures Remove the SD2. {MC:8.10_Post-Reading Conveyance IP Sensor (SD2)} Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly. {MC:8.11_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly} Remove the rubber rollers (A) and (C). {MC:8.15_Rubber Rollers (A and B)} {MC:8.16_Rubber Rollers (C and D)} ...
  • Page 705 MC-216 8.20 Guide (B) {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Guides  Removal Procedures Remove the rubber rollers (E) and (G). {MC:8.17_Rubber Rollers (E and F)} {MC:8.18_Rubber Rollers (G and H)} Remove the guide (B).  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-216 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 706 MC-217 8.21 Grip Shaft  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). l CHECK 1 {MC:8.6_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} Make sure that cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side).
  • Page 707 MC-218 Erasure Conveyor Unit Remove the erasure conveyor unit. u NOTE u When removing the erasure conveyor unit, take hold of the designated portions Erasure Conveyor Unit to perform the procedures. If you grasp the rollers, guides, or other portions, they may be deformed.
  • Page 708 MC-219  Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the erasure conveyor. u NOTE u Open the guide. When installing the erasure conveyor unit, take hold of the designated portions to perform the procedures. If you grasp the rollers, guides, or other portions, they may be deformed.
  • Page 709 MC-220 Close the guide. Reinstall the lamp assembly. {MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly} Reinstall the covers. - Lower front cover - Upper front light protect plate - Middle right-hand side cover - Upper left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} MC-220 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 710 MC-221 Lamp Assembly Remove the lamp assembly. u NOTES u {SP:INDEX} - When handling the lamp assembly, wear gloves so that the filter located on the CAUTION bottom face of the lamp assembly is not soiled. Do not touch the surface (filter face) of the lamp assembly immediately after the - Do not grasp the filter face when holding the lamp assembly.
  • Page 711 MC-222  Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the covers. - Lower front cover Reinstall the lamp assembly. - Middle left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} MC-222 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 712 MC-223 Duct {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the lamp assembly. {MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly} Remove the duct.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-223 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 713 MC-224 Duct Assembly Remove the duct assembly. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the duct. {MC:9.3_Duct} Disconnect the connector.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-224 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 714 MC-225 Fan (FANE1) Remove the FANE1. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the duct. {MC:9.3_Duct} Disconnect the connector.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the FANE1 is attached in its correct orientation. MC-225 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 715 MC-226 Fan (FANE2) Remove the FANE2. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the duct assembly. {MC:9.4_Duct Assembly} Disconnect the connector.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the FANE2 is attached in its correct orientation. MC-226 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 716 MC-227 Fan (FANE3) Remove the FANE3. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the duct. {MC:9.3_Duct} Disconnect the connector.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the FANE3 is attached in its correct orientation. MC-227 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 717 MC-228 Filter (#20001 or Later)  Reinstallation Procedures {SP:INDEX} Reinstall the filter.  Removal Procedures Remove the lamp assembly. {MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly} Remove the filter. Reinstall the lamp assembly. {MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly}  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the filter is attached in its correct orientation. MC-228 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 718 MC-229 Lamps {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the filter. {MC:9.8_Filter (#20001 or Later)} Remove the lamps. u NOTES u - Remove the lamps in such order as illustrated below. - While avoiding the tab of the lamp assembly, detach the lamp aslant. Otherwise, the lamp may be scratched or damaged.
  • Page 719 MC-230  Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the lamps. u NOTES u - Install the lamps in such order as illustrated below. - While avoiding the tab of the lamp assembly, attach the lamp aslant. Otherwise, the lamp may be scratched or damaged. Reinstall the filter.
  • Page 720 MC-231 9.10 Reflection Plate Assembly Disconnect the connectors. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the lamps. {MC:9.9_Lamps} Remove the duct assembly. {MC:9.4_Duct Assembly} Release the clamps. Mount the duct. u NOTE u Before mounting the duct, put aside the cables. Otherwise, the cables might be pinched by the duct.
  • Page 721 MC-232 9.11 Lamp Temperature Sensor (THE1) Put the lamp assembly upside down, and remove the reflection plate assembly. {SP:INDEX} u INSTRUCTION u  Removal Procedures The reflection plate assembly removed should be placed on a clean cloth or the like. Otherwise, the reflection plate assembly might be soiled. Remove the reflection plate assembly. {MC:9.10_Reflection Plate Assembly} Remove the THE1.
  • Page 722 MC-233 9.12 Safety Thermostat Sensor (TSWE1)  Reinstallation Procedures {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u To attach the FAST-ON terminal, plug it all the way in.  Removal Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Remove the reflection plate assembly. {MC:9.10_Reflection Plate Assembly} Remove the TSWE1. u NOTE u To detach the FAST-ON terminal, press the shaded portion in the illustration below to take it off.
  • Page 723 MC-234 9.13 Sockets  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the reflection plate assembly. l CHECK 1 {MC:9.10_Reflection Plate Assembly} Make sure that the sockets are attached according to the engravings on the bracket. Remove the sockets. MC-234 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 724 MC-235 9.14 INV17A Board Remove the INV17A board. u NOTE u {SP:INDEX} When removing the board, tilt it aslant to take it off. If it is not tilted, the retention CAUTION clips may be damaged. When servicing the printed circuit board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to ground your body.
  • Page 725 MC-236 9.15 INV17B Board Remove the INV17B board. u NOTE u {SP:INDEX} When removing the board, tilt it aslant to take it off. If it is not tilted, the retention CAUTION clips may be damaged. When servicing the printed circuit board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to ground your body.
  • Page 726 MC-237 9.16 IP Switchback Assembly Remove the IP switchback assembly. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Close the guide.  Exploded View For the exploded view of the IP switchback assembly, see the Service Parts List. {SP:07G_ERASURE CONVEYOR 7} ...
  • Page 727 MC-238 9.17 Post-Reading Conveyance Standby IP 9.18 Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2) Sensor (SE1) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Remove the erasure conveyor unit. Remove the SE2. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Remove the SE1.
  • Page 728 MC-239 9.19 Erasure Side-Positioning Standby HP  Reinstallation Procedures Sensor (SE4) u NOTE u Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Move the latch assembly to the position illustrated below. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
  • Page 729 MC-240 9.20 Brackets  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the erasure conveyor unit. l CHECK 1 {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Before attaching the brackets, make sure that the actuator and sensor are in such a Remove the brackets.
  • Page 730 MC-241 9.21 Grip Release HP Sensor (SE5) 9.22 Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the brackets. Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.20_Brackets} {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Remove the SE5. Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly. {SP:07A_ERASURE CONVEYOR 1} ...
  • Page 731 MC-242 9.23 Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid Remove the SOLE1. (SOLE1) {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Disconnect the connectors. Remove the bracket.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the shaft of the solenoid is attached properly to the bracket.
  • Page 732 MC-243 9.24 Reflection Plate  Check/Adjustment Procedures {SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1 When attaching the reflection plate guide, make sure that there is no gap between the  Removal Procedures reflection plate guide and the guide. Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Remove the reflection plate. u NOTE u The guide material differs depending on the part No. - 363N2476B: Semitransparent part - 363N2476: Opaque part The machines with the following serial numbers are equipped with a new-model guide (363N2476B) before shipment.
  • Page 733 MC-244 9.25 Timing Belt (A) Remove the timing belt (A) and the timing belt wheels. u NOTE u {SP:INDEX} Remove the two timing belt wheels in parallel. If only one is to be removed, the  Locations of Timing Belts latch of the wheel gets damaged.
  • Page 734 MC-245 9.25.2 Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the timing belt (A) and the timing belt wheels. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 7 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Reinstall the spacers and bearings. Put the erasure conveyor unit in such an orientation as illustrated below.
  • Page 735 MC-246 After the spur gear is pushed in with the rod end held, check to ensure Reinstall the bracket. that the latch of the spur gear gets caught in the groove of the rod and does not come off. Reinstall the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Verify the attachment of the housing and the bearing from the bottom of the erasure conveyer unit.
  • Page 736 MC-247 9.26 Timing Belt (B) Remove the screw. {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Timing Belts 9.26.1 Removal Procedures Remove the erasure conveyor unit. Remove the tension coil spring. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Carry out the operations in the steps 3 to 5 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 737 MC-248 9.26.2 Reinstallation Procedures Remove the timing belt (B). For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. REFERENCE The timing belt (B) is mounted in the passage indicated in the figure below. MC-248 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 738 MC-249 9.27 Timing Belt (C) Remove the timing belt (C) and the timing belt wheels. u NOTE u {SP:INDEX} Remove the two timing belt wheels in parallel. If only one is to be removed, the  Locations of Timing Belts latch of the wheel gets damaged.
  • Page 739 MC-250 9.27.2 Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the timing belt (C) and the timing belt wheels. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Reinstall the spacers and bearings. MC-250 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 740 MC-251 Check to ensure that the latch of the spur gear gets caught in the Reinstall the erasure conveyor unit. groove of the rod and does not come off. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Verify the attachment of the housing and the bearing from the bottom of the erasure conveyer unit.
  • Page 741 MC-252 9.28 Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gears) {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the timing belt (B). {MC:9.26_Timing Belt (B)} Remove the spur gears.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the spur gears are attached in their correct orientations. MC-252 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 742 MC-253 9.29 Grip Mechanism (Reference Side) Remove the grip arm. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the brackets. {MC:9.20_Brackets} Remove the timing belt (A). {MC:9.25_Timing Belt (A)} Remove the spur gears.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the spur gears are attached in their correct orientations.
  • Page 743 MC-254 9.30 Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side) Remove the E-ring and the KL clip, and remove the spacer and the grip arm. {SP:INDEX} 9.30.1 Removal Procedures Remove the timing belt (C). {MC:9.27_Timing Belt (C)} Remove the conveyance mechanism (opposite reference side gears). {MC:9.28_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gears)} Carry out the operations in the steps 4 and 5 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 744 MC-255 9.30.2 Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the E-ring, spacer, and KL clip. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 5 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Reinstall the bracket. Verify the attachment locations of the cam and the spur gear. Reinstall the grip arm. Reinstall the conveyance mechanism (opposite reference side gears).
  • Page 745 MC-256 9.31 Tensioner Assembly 9.32 Guide (A) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Locations of Guides Remove the timing belt (B). {MC:9.26_Timing Belt (B)} Remove the tensioner assembly.  Removal Procedures Remove the covers. - Lower front cover - Upper front light protect plate {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the guide (A).
  • Page 746 MC-257 9.33 Guide (B) Remove the guide (B). {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Guides  Removal Procedures Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Remove the tensioner assembly. {MC:9.31_Tensioner Assembly} Remove the guide (A). {MC:9.32_Guide (A)} Put the erasure conveyor unit in such an orientation as illustrated below.
  • Page 747 MC-258 9.34 Guide (C) Remove the guide (C). {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Guides  Removal Procedures Remove the shock-absorbing roller assembly. {MC:9.22_Shock-Absorbing Roller Assembly}  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-258 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 748 MC-259 9.35 Latch Drive Unit Rotate the spur gear of the latch drive unit to the position indicated by the arrow. {SP:INDEX} 9.35.1 Removal Procedures Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). {MC:9.29_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side). {MC:9.30_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)} Remove the guide pressure bracket.
  • Page 749 MC-260 Carry out the operations of the steps 8 and 9 from the direction Carry out the operations of the step 11 from the direction indicated by indicated by the arrow in the figure below. the arrow in the figure below. Remove the latch drive unit. Remove the screws. Remove the screws. ...
  • Page 750 MC-261 9.35.2 Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the latch drive unit. Rotate the spur gear of the latch drive unit to the position indicated by the arrow. u NOTE u When the spur gear is rotated, the latch assembly moves inward. Unless the spur gear has moved to a specified position, the latch of the latch assembly might get damaged when the latch drive unit is removed.
  • Page 751 MC-262 Rotate the spur gear of the latch drive unit fully counterclockwise. Carry out the operations of the steps 7 and 8 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Attach the screws. Push in the latch drive unit to its retained position. Attach the screws. MC-262 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 752 MC-263 Carry out the operations in the step 10 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Connect the connector and the screw, and secure the clamp. Reinstall the guide pressure bracket. {MC:9.48_Guide Pressure Bracket} Reinstall the grip mechanism (opposite reference side). {MC:9.30_Grip Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side)} Reinstall the grip mechanism (reference side).
  • Page 753 MC-264 9.36 Latch Assembly (Reference Side) 9.37 IP Transport Motor (ME1) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). Remove the conveyance mechanism (opposite reference side gears). {MC:9.29_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} {MC:9.28_Conveyance Mechanism (Opposite Reference Side Gears)} Remove the ME1 assembly.
  • Page 754 MC-265 9.38 Side-Positioning Motor (ME2) 9.39 Grip Release Motor (ME3) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the latch drive unit. Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). {MC:9.35_Latch Drive Unit} {MC:9.29_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} Remove the ME2 assembly. Remove the ME2.
  • Page 755 MC-266 9.40 Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F)  Check/Adjustment Procedures {SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1 The tension coil springs differ in length depending on where they are attached. Make  Locations of Rubber Rollers sure that the tension coil springs are attached at their correct positions. ...
  • Page 756 MC-267  Detailed Illustrated Procedure (Step 4) {CHECK 1} {CHECK 2} MC-267 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 757 MC-268 9.41 Rubber Rollers (G and H) Remove the rubber rollers (G and H). {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Rubber Rollers  Removal Procedures Remove the SE2. {MC:9.18_Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2)} Remove the timing belt (B). {MC:9.26_Timing Belt (B)}  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
  • Page 758 MC-269 9.42 Rubber Rollers (I and J) Remove the rubber rollers (I and J). {CHECK 1} {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Rubber Rollers  Removal Procedures Remove the SOLE1. {MC:9.23_Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid (SOLE1)} Remove the timing belt (B). {MC:9.26_Timing Belt (B)} ...
  • Page 759 MC-270  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Align the hole of the side plate and the housing together before attaching the rubber roller. MC-270 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 760 MC-271 9.43 Guide (D) Remove the screw. {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Guides 9.43.1 Removal Procedures Remove the ME1. {MC:9.37_IP Transport Motor (ME1)} Remove the screws. Remove the ME3. {MC:9.39_Grip Release Motor (ME3)} Remove the latch assembly (reference side). {MC:9.36_Latch Assembly (Reference Side)} Carry out the operations of the steps 5 and 6 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 761 MC-272 Carry out the operations of the steps 8 and 9 from the direction Remove the guide while keeping clear of the half punches inside the indicated by the arrow in the figure below. side plate. u NOTE u Remove the guide carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is tilted, it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be removed.
  • Page 762 MC-273 9.43.2 Reinstallation Procedures Insert the tip of the guide between the rods of the rubber rollers, and lead the tip of the guide onto the half punch in the side plate. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 and 3 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 763 MC-274 Carry out the operations in the step 5 from the direction indicated by Carry out the operations of the steps 7 and 8 from the direction the arrow in the figure below. indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Check to ensure that the tip of the guide is mounted on the half punch. Attach the screw.
  • Page 764 MC-275 Reinstall the latch assembly (reference side). {MC:9.36_Latch Assembly (Reference Side)} Reinstall the ME3. {MC:9.39_Grip Release Motor (ME3)} Reinstall the ME1. {MC:9.37_IP Transport Motor (ME1)} MC-275 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 765 MC-276 9.44 Guide (E) Remove the screws. {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Guides 9.44.1 Removal Procedures Remove the ME1. {MC:9.37_IP Transport Motor (ME1)} Remove the screws. Remove the ME3. {MC:9.39_Grip Release Motor (ME3)} Remove the latch assembly (reference side). {MC:9.36_Latch Assembly (Reference Side)} Carry out the operations of the steps 5 and 6 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 766 MC-277 Raise the rear of the guide and move it backward. Remove the guide while keeping clear of the half punches inside the side plate. u NOTE u u NOTE u Move the guide backward carefully not to allow the guide to tilt laterally. If the guide is tilted, it might get caught with the side plate and cannot be removed.
  • Page 767 MC-278 9.44.2 Reinstallation Procedures Insert the tip of the guide between the rods of the rubber rollers and lower the rear of the guide. Insert the guide while keeping clear of the half punches, and lead the u NOTE u tip of the guide onto the half punch in the side plate.
  • Page 768 MC-279 Carry out the operations in the steps 4 and 5 from the direction Reinstall the latch assembly (reference side). indicated by the arrow in the figure below. {MC:9.36_Latch Assembly (Reference Side)} Reinstall the ME3. {MC:9.39_Grip Release Motor (ME3)} Reinstall the ME1. {MC:9.37_IP Transport Motor (ME1)} Attach the screws. Attach the screws.
  • Page 769 MC-280 9.45 Grip Shaft  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the grip mechanism (reference side). l CHECK 1 {MC:9.29_Grip Mechanism (Reference Side)} Make sure that the cam and spur gears are attached in their correct orientations. Remove the grip mechanism (opposite reference side).
  • Page 770 MC-281 9.46 Guide (F) Remove the guide (F). {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Guides  Removal Procedures Remove the ME3. {MC:9.39_Grip Release Motor (ME3)} Remove the rubber rollers (A and B). {MC:9.40_Rubber Rollers (A, B, C, D, E, and F)}  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
  • Page 771 MC-282 9.47 Branch Path Changeover Guide Remove the guide. {SP:INDEX}  Locations of Guides  Removal Procedures Remove the SE2. {MC:9.18_Switchback Standby IP Sensor (SE2)} Remove the SOLE1. {MC:9.23_Branch Path Guide Driving Solenoid (SOLE1)} Remove the tensioner assembly. {MC:9.31_Tensioner Assembly} Remove the guide (B).
  • Page 772 MC-283 Remove the shaft. Remove the branch path changeover guide. Remove the shaft. MC-283 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 773 MC-284  Reinstallation Procedures REFERENCE With reference to the illustration below, install the branch path changeover guide and u NOTE u bearings. When the branch path changeover guide is of an old type, apply tapes. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-284 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 774 MC-285 9.48 Guide Pressure Bracket {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Remove the brackets.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-285 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 775 MC-286 9.49 Branch Path Changeover Guide Driving Remove the bracket. Arm (Right) {SP:INDEX} 9.49.1 Removal Procedures Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Carry out the operations in the steps 3 to 9 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Remove the spring. Disconnect the connectors.
  • Page 776 MC-287 9.49.2 Reinstallation Procedures Remove the screws. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Remove the main body of the solenoid, and then remove the shaft of the solenoid. Remove the branch path changeover guide driving arm (right). MC-287 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 777 MC-288 9.50 Branch Path Changeover Guide Driving Remove the tension coil spring. Arm (Left) {SP:INDEX} 9.50.1 Removal Procedures Remove the erasure conveyor unit. {MC:9.1_Erasure Conveyor Unit} Carry out the operations in the steps 3 to 8 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Remove the timing belt (B).
  • Page 778 MC-289 9.50.2 Reinstallation Procedures Remove the tension coil spring. u NOTE u When reversing the step 3, be sure to follow the note to attach the retaining screw. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Remove the KL clip. Remove the bearing, spur gear, bearing and tensioner assembly.
  • Page 779 MC-290 9.51 Tension Coil Spring Remove the bracket. {SP:INDEX} 9.51.1 Removal Procedures Remove the timing belt (B). {MC:9.26_Timing Belt (B)} Remove the timing belt (C). {MC:9.27_Timing Belt (C)} Carry out the operations in the steps 4 to 7 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below.
  • Page 780 MC-291 9.51.2 Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the E-ring, spacer, and KL clip. Carry out the operations in the steps 2 to 7 from the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure below. Reinstall the bracket. Attach the tension coil spring. Reinstall the grip arm. MC-291 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 781 MC-292 Attach the spur gear. After the spur gear is pushed in with the rod end held, check to ensure that the latch of the spur gear gets caught in the groove of the rod and u NOTE u does not come off. Attach the spur gear in the orientation where the engraving “B”...
  • Page 782 MC-293 9.52 Erasure Lamp Assembly (#50001 or later) Remove the lamp temperature sensor (THE1). {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the lamp assembly. {MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly} Disconnect the connectors and release the clamps. Disconnect the connectors. Remove the duct. MC-293 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 783 MC-294 Remove the screws, then remove the erasure lamp assembly.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-294 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 784 MC-295 9.53 INV26A Board (#50001 or later) 9.54 ERS23A Board (#50001 or later) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX} CAUTION CAUTION When servicing the printed circuit board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband When servicing the printed circuit board, be sure to wear an antistatic wristband to ground your body.
  • Page 785 MC-296 9.55 Filter (#50001 or Later) {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the lamp assembly. {MC:9.2_Lamp Assembly} Remove the filter. u NOTE u Exercise care not to damage the lamp when removing the filter. MC-296 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 786 MC-297  Reinstallation Procedures Reinstall the filter. u NOTES u - Exercise care not to damage the lamp when reinstalling the filter. - Before installing the reflection plate, make sure that the lamps are placed evenly spaced apart with the shock absorbers. - Install the filter and the dustproof material so that the edge of the filter will be around the center of the dustproof material.
  • Page 787 MC-298 10. Scanning Optics Unit 10.1 Nothing MC-298 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 788 MC-299 BLANK PAGE MC-299 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 789 MC-300 BLANK PAGE MC-300 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 790 MC-301 BLANK PAGE MC-301 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 791 MC-302 10.2 Scanning Optics Unit 10.2.1 Removal Procedures {SP:INDEX} Remove the covers. - Lower right-hand side cover WARNING - Lower left-hand side cover The scanning optics unit should not be removed or installed by other than a {MC:3.1_Covers} service engineer who has been trained to do so. Remove the scanning optics unit.
  • Page 792 MC-303 10.2.2 Reinstallation Procedures Apply the spacers to the subscanning unit frame. uNOTE u Mount the scanning optics unit on the subscanning unit. Apply the spacer kit (898Y1175) with the countermeasure taken to the machine with the following serial numbers. Machines with serial number of #21160 or earlier and #21315.
  • Page 793 MC-304 REFERENCE While pressing the scanning optics unit in the direction indicated by the arrow in the figure, retain the subscanning unit. By pressing the two positioning brackets and the knob of the scanning optics unit against the frame of the subscanning unit, the scanning optics unit can be installed in place.
  • Page 794 MC-305 Connect the connectors. Check to ensure that the screws once removed are snugly retained. Reinstall the covers. - Lower right-hand side cover - Lower left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Carry out the Check/Adjustment Procedures. {MC:10.2.3_Check/Adjustment Procedures} MC-305 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 795 MC-306 10.2.3 Check/Adjustment Procedures Check the following points. u INSTRUCTION u l The RU normally enters the READY state. When the scanning optics unit is replaced with a new one, it is necessary to install the machine-specific data bundled therewith. Take the following steps to install the machine-specific data.
  • Page 796 MC-307 11. Light-Collecting Unit Disconnect the connectors. NOTES - To disconnect the CN2, use its special jig. Otherwise, the connector located on 11.1 Upper Light-Collecting Guide the board might be damaged. - When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a screwdriver's {SP:INDEX} shaft or the like as a pivot and detach it at right angles relative to the board.
  • Page 797 MC-308 Remove the screws. Remove the upper light-collecting guide. MC-308 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 798 MC-309  Reinstallation Procedures Secure the upper light-collecting guide in place. Reinstall the upper light-collecting guide. MC-309 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 799 MC-310  Check/Adjustment Procedures Connect the connectors. NOTE u INSTRUCTION u The CN2 should be attached at right angles relative to the board. If it is attached When the upper light-collecting guide is replaced with a new one, it is necessary to aslant, the connector located on the board might be damaged.
  • Page 800 MC-311 Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. {MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence. MC-311 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 801 MC-312 11.2 Lower Light-Collecting Guide  Removal Procedures {SP:INDEX} Remove the covers. - Lower front cover CAUTION - Lower front light protect plate - Never touch the light-receiving face of the light-collecting unit even when you - Lower right-hand side cover are wearing gloves.
  • Page 802 MC-313 Disconnect the connectors. Remove the screws. NOTES - To disconnect the CN2, use its special jig. Otherwise, the connector located on the board might be damaged. - When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a screwdriver's shaft or the like as a pivot and detach it at right angles relative to the board.
  • Page 803 MC-314  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the lower light-collecting guide. Reinstall the lower light-collecting guide. MC-314 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 804 MC-315 Secure the lower light-collecting guide in place. Connect the connectors. NOTE The CN2 should be attached at right angles relative to the board. If it is attached aslant, the connector located on the board might be damaged. Reinstall the covers. - Lower front cover - Lower front light protect plate - Lower right-hand side cover...
  • Page 805 MC-316  Check/Adjustment Procedures Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. u INSTRUCTION u When the lower light-collecting guide is replaced with a new one, it is necessary to install the machine-specific data bundled therewith. Take the following steps to install the machine-specific data.
  • Page 806 MC-317 11.3 PMT17A/PMT23A/PMT26A/PMT27B Board Remove the PMT17A board together with the shield member. NOTES {SP:INDEX} - With #20001 or later, to disconnect the CN2, use its special jig. Otherwise, the CAUTION connector located on the board might be damaged. When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static - When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a screwdriver's wristband to ground your body.
  • Page 807 MC-318  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the PMT17A board. Turn ON the power of the RU. Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state.  Reinstallation Procedures u NOTE u To attach the PMT17A board together with the shield member, mount it so that the socket of the PMT17A board and the connecting portion of the light-collecting guide assembly are parallel to each other.
  • Page 808 MC-319 11.4 PMR17B/PMR23B/PMR26B/PMR27B Board Remove the PMR17B board together with the shield member. NOTES {SP:INDEX} - With #20001 or later, to disconnect the CN2, use its special jig. Otherwise, the CAUTION connector located on the board might be damaged. When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static - When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a screwdriver's wristband to ground your body.
  • Page 809 MC-320  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the PMR17B board. Turn ON the power of the RU. Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. ■ Reinstallation Procedures u NOTE u To attach the PMR17B board together with the shield member, mount it so that the socket of the PMR17B board and the connecting portion of the light-collecting guide assembly are parallel to each other.
  • Page 810 MC-321 12. Subscanning Unit Disconnect the connectors. 12.1 Subscanning Unit {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u Because the subscanning unit is heavy, pay attention to the following points when removing, installing, and moving it. - Before proceeding with the procedures, secure sufficient working space around the machine.
  • Page 811 MC-322 Pull out the subscanning unit. Remove the subscanning unit. CAUTION CAUTION - Do not pull out the subscanning unit too much. The subscanning unit might When putting down the subscanning unit in another place, use care not to get topple down and be damaged.
  • Page 812 MC-323  Reinstallation Procedures Secure the subscanning unit in place. Reinstall the subscanning unit. MC-323 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 813 MC-324 Connect the connectors. Reinstall the scanning optics unit. {MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit} Reinstall the upper light-collecting guide. {MC:11.1_Upper Light-Collecting Guide} Reinstall the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} MC-324 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 814 MC-325 12.2 Transparent Cover 12.3 Antistatic Member {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the cover. Remove the transparent cover. - Lower right-hand side cover {MC:12.2_Transparent Cover} {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the antistatic member. Remove the transparent cover. {SP:10H_SUB SCANNING UNIT 8} ...
  • Page 815 MC-326 12.4 SUS Belt  Reinstallation Procedures {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u Use care not to confuse the front and back of the SUS belt when attaching it.  Removal Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Remove the transparent cover. {MC:12.2_Transparent Cover} ...
  • Page 816 MC-327 ® 12.5 Kapton Belt l #60001 or later {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the cover. - Lower left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} ® Remove the Kapton belt. u NOTE u After removing the tension coil spring, support the tensioner by hand. Otherwise, the tensioner might incline by its own weight, thereby damaging the Kapton ®...
  • Page 817 MC-328  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 ® - Make sure that the Kapton belt is mounted with its date indicating side up, so that the arrow mark faces the side plate. ® - Manually rotate the flywheel to verify that the Kapton belt does not come off. MC-328 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E...
  • Page 818 MC-329 12.6 Tensioner (Right-Hand Side) 12.7 Tensioner (Left-Hand Side) {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures u NOTE u u NOTE u When removing the tensioner, be sure to remove the SUS belt as well. If you try to When removing the tensioner, be sure to remove the Kapton ®...
  • Page 819 MC-330 12.8 Flywheel  Reinstallation Procedures {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u - Use care not to damage the surface in contact with the Kapton ® belt.  Removal Procedures ® - Before reinstalling the flywheel, clean the Kapton belt contacting surface with ethanol.
  • Page 820 MC-331 12.9 Sub Scanning Motor Remove the FFM motor. {CHECK} 12.9.1 FFM Motor (MZ1) {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
  • Page 821 MC-332  Check/Adjustment Procedures l Preparation for output image (exposure) If the MZ1 is replaced, perform the following check procedures. Perform primary erasure on the IP to be used for subscan length - DIP switch setting check. - Preparation for output image (exposure) {Instruction} - Subscan length check u NOTE u...
  • Page 822 MC-333 l Subscan length check l Subscan length adjustment Output the image exposed at 1 mR. With reference to the DIP Switch Setting List (Table 1), change the DIP switch setting. CL exposure menu selection screen: “TEST”, “Image Format” or “Image Format-2”, “SINGLE” REFERENCE {Instruction} Changing the “speed fine-adjustment setup factor”...
  • Page 823 MC-334 12.9.2 5PM Motor (MZ1) DIP Switch Setting List (Table 1) Switch Speed fine-adjustment {SP:INDEX} setup factor (%) u NOTES u -1.6 - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to -1.5 ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body -1.4 may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
  • Page 824 MC-335  Removal Procedures (CRD5107P board) Remove the 5PM motor. Remove the CRD5107P board. u NOTE u When you replace the pulley, verify the allowable value of the subscan length in accordance with “■Check/Adjustment Procedure”. If the allowable value of the subscan length is not within the predefined range, adjust the subscan speed of the MUTL.
  • Page 825 MC-336  Check/Adjustment Procedures l Subscan length check If the MZ1 is replaced, perform the following check procedures. Output the image exposed at 1 mR. - Preparation for output image (exposure) CL exposure menu selection screen: - Subscan length check “TEST”, “Image Format”...
  • Page 826 MC-337 12.10 Cleaning Brush Assembly {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit. {MC:7.1_Side-Positioning Conveyor Unit} Remove the cleaning brush assembly.  Exploded View For the exploded view of the cleaning brush assembly, see the Service Parts List. {SP:10B_SUB SCANNING UNIT 2} ...
  • Page 827 MC-338 12.11 Driving-Side Grip Release HP Remove the SZ2 and SZ3. Sensor (SZ2) and Driven-Side Grip Release HP Sensor (SZ3) {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the cover. - Lower left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Disconnect the connectors.  Reinstallation Procedures u NOTE u Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.
  • Page 828 MC-339 12.12 IP Stopper HP Sensor (SZ5)  Reinstallation Procedures {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly.  Removal Procedures Remove the cover. - Lower left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the shock-absorbing rubbers. {MC:12.30_Shock-Absorbing Rubbers} Remove the SZ5.
  • Page 829 MC-340 12.13 Grip Drive Motor (MZ2)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Check/Adjustment Procedures  Removal Procedures l CHECK 1 Remove the scanning optics unit. The threaded holes for mounting the MZ2 assembly are adjacent to the threaded {MC:10._Scanning Optics Unit} holes for mounting the sensor bracket.
  • Page 830 MC-341 12.14 Dust Removal Motor (MZ3) l CHECK 2 Make sure that the bearings of the driven shaft and driving shaft grip release arms are {SP:INDEX} in contact with the outer periphery of the cam.  Removal Procedures Remove the flywheel. {MC:12.8_Flywheel} Remove the MZ3 assembly.
  • Page 831 MC-342  Reinstallation Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures INSTRUCTION l CHECK 1 Align the positions of the slit (large), slit (small), and the D-cut flat surface of the Check the mounting orientations for the D-cut flat surface of the light-collecting shaft as appropriate. light-collecting shaft, gear (large), and gear (small). Check to see whether the engagement between the spur gear (large) and the worm gear of the MZ3 has some backlash.
  • Page 832 MC-343 12.15 IP Stopper Drive Motor (MZ4) Remove the MZ4. {SP:10D_SUB SCANNING UNIT 4} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the cleaning brush assembly. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {MC:12.10_Cleaning Brush Assembly} Remove the SZ5.  Check/Adjustment Procedures {MC:12.12_IP Stopper HP Sensor (SZ5)} l CHECK 1 Disconnect the connector and remove the screws.
  • Page 833 MC-344 12.16 Driving Shaft Grip Release Arm Remove the driving shaft grip release arm. {CHECK 1} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} Remove the flywheel. {MC:12.8_Flywheel} MC-344 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 834 MC-345  Exploded View  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the bearing of the driving shaft grip release arm is in contact with the outer periphery of the cam.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. l CHECK 2 Make sure that there is no gap between the bracket and fork.
  • Page 835 MC-346 12.17 Driven Shaft Grip Release Arm and IP Remove the driven shaft grip release arm. Stopper {CHECK 1} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the transparent cover. {MC:12.2_Transparent Cover} Remove the MZ4. {MC:12.15_IP Stopper Drive Motor (MZ4)} MC-346 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 836 MC-347  Exploded View  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 Make sure that the bearing of the driven shaft grip release arm is in contact with the outer periphery of the cam.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. l CHECK 2 Make sure that there is no gap between the bracket and fork.
  • Page 837 MC-348 12.18 Spur Gears  Check/Adjustment Procedures {SP:INDEX} l CHECK 1 Refer to the illustration below when attaching the spur gears.  Removal Procedures Remove the MZ3. {MC:12.14_Dust Removal Motor (MZ3)} Remove the spur gears. l CHECK 2 Installation should be done in the positions illustrated below. ...
  • Page 838 MC-349 12.19 Dust Removal HP Sensor (SZ4) {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the spur gears. {MC:12.18_Spur Gears} Remove the SZ4.  Reinstallation Procedures u NOTE u Make sure that the latches of the sensor are hooked properly. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-349 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E...
  • Page 839 MC-350 12.20 Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the transparent cover. l CHECK 1 {MC:12.2_Transparent Cover} Refer to the illustration below when attaching the driven shaft grip roller (upper). Remove the cleaning brush assembly.
  • Page 840 MC-351 12.21 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Upper)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the upper light-collecting guide. l CHECK 1 {MC:11.1_Upper Light-Collecting Guide} Refer to the illustration below when attaching the driving shaft grip roller (upper). Remove the transparent cover.
  • Page 841 MC-352 12.22 Antistatic Member  Check/Adjustment Procedures If image abnormalities such as streaks are observed in the IP conveyance direction, {SP:INDEX} moderate warpage of the antistatic member.  Removal Procedures u NOTE u Be sure to check on a horizontal working table. Remove the flywheel.
  • Page 842 MC-353 12.23 IP Leading-Edge Sensor (SZ1)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Check  Removal Procedures l CHECK 1 Remove the antistatic member. Make sure that the cable is attached along the bracket, side by side. {MC:12.22_Antistatic Member} Remove the SZ1.
  • Page 843 MC-354 12.24 Light-Collecting Mirror Remove the light-collecting mirror. REFERENCE {SP:INDEX} When removing the light-collecting mirror, rotate the light-collecting shaft until the INSTRUCTION light-collecting mirror retaining screws are easily accessible. When handling the light-collecting mirror, pay attention to the following points. - Wear gloves.
  • Page 844 MC-355 12.25 Light-Collecting Shaft  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the light-collecting mirror. l CHECK 1 {MC:12.24_Light-Collecting Mirror} Make sure that the guide is attached in the orientation as illustrated below. Remove the light-collecting shaft.
  • Page 845 MC-356 12.26 Glass Guide Shift the operation direction from the back of the machine to the front of the machine. {SP:INDEX} INSTRUCTIONS Move the bracket. - If the glass guide is soiled, clean it by use of ethanol. - Wear gloves when handling the glass guide. ...
  • Page 846 MC-357  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the glass guide. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.  Check/Adjustment Procedures l CHECK 1 When attaching the glass guide, do so in such an orientation as illustrated below. MC-357 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 847 MC-358 12.27 Center Guide  Removal Procedures {SP:INDEX} Remove the light-collecting shaft. CAUTION {MC:12.25_Light-Collecting Shaft} Never remove or loosen the base mounting screws that retain the center guide Remove the glass guide. in place. If they were removed or loosened, image nonuniformity and IP jam {MC:12.26_Glass Guide} would occur, so that it becomes necessary to replace the unit.
  • Page 848 MC-359 12.28 Driving Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) and  Reinstallation Procedures Driven Shaft Grip Roller (Lower) For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Check/Adjustment Procedures u NOTE u - When handling the driving shaft grip roller (lower) and driven shaft grip roller (lower), l CHECK 1 use care not to scratch or shock them.
  • Page 849 MC-360 12.29 Grounding Wires Remove the grounding wires. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the covers. - Lower front cover - Lower front light protect plate - Lower right-hand side cover - Lower left-hand side cover - Lower rear cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the side-positioning conveyor unit.
  • Page 850 MC-361 12.30 Shock-Absorbing Rubbers Remove the shock-absorbing rubbers. {SP:INDEX} u NOTE u When replacing the shock-absorbing rubbers, replace all the two rubbers.  Removal Procedures Remove the covers. - Lower front cover - Lower right-hand side cover  Reinstallation Procedures - Lower left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps.
  • Page 851 MC-362 12.31 Subscanning Unit (Top) Remove the subscanning unit (top). {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the shock-absorbing rubbers. {MC:12.30_Shock-Absorbing Rubbers} Remove the subscanning unit. {MC:12.1_Subscanning Unit}  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-362 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 852 MC-363 12.32 Bracket Assembly {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the subscanning unit (top). {MC:12.31_Subscanning Unit (Top)} Remove the bracket assembly.  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-363 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 853 MC-364 12.33 Lower Light-Collecting Guide Brace Remove the lower light-collecting guide brace assembly. Assembly {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the post-reading conveyor unit. {MC:8.1_Post-Reading Conveyor Unit} Remove the transparent cover. {MC:12.2_Transparent Cover}  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. MC-364 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E...
  • Page 854 MC-365 13. PC Boards Disconnect the connectors. {CHECK 1} {CHECK 2} 13.1 Board Bracket Assembly u INSTRUCTION u {SP:INDEX} Remove the flat cable as instructed in the illustration below. CAUTION When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body.
  • Page 855 MC-366  Check/Adjustment Procedures Remove the board bracket assembly. l CHECK 1 The CN6 cable should be located below the CN3 cable. l CHECK 2 Make sure that the cables are snuggly attached.  Reinstallation Procedures l CHECK 3 For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. Make sure that CN2 on the IMG17A/B board and CN15 on the scanner board are snuggly connected together.
  • Page 856 MC-367 13.2 CPU91A Board  Reinstallation Procedures {SP:INDEX} Make DIP SW1 setting as appropriate. CAUTIONS u INSTRUCTION u This setting should be the same as that on the CPU91A board removed. - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body.
  • Page 857 MC-368  DIP SW1 Setting on the CPU91A Board Turn ON the power of the RU. NOTES - DIP SW1 settings, other than No. 7, should be used in the OFF position. - The setting for No. 7 of DIP SW differs depending on the device type installed. If incorrect setting is made, the RU will not operate normally.
  • Page 858 MC-369 13.3 IMG17A/B Board Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right {SP:INDEX} corners of the touch panel. CAUTIONS REFERENCE - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static If your touch is accepted by the panel, a “beep”...
  • Page 859 Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU for its data backup, and opens, type [“C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPCTo back up the “CONFIGURATION”, “SCN ALL DATA”, and “HISTORY ol.exe”] and click on the [OK] button.
  • Page 860 MC-371 Remove the CPU91A board. Turn ON the power of the RU. {MC:13.2_CPU91A Board} Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. Remove the IMG17A/B board, and install a new IMG17A/B board. After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right corners of the touch panel.
  • Page 861 MC-372 Set the IP address of the RU. Set the IP address of the FTP server. u NOTES u u NOTES u - Enter the IP address of the RU that is set in the CL. - Enter the IP address of the CL. - When RU software version 1.2 or later is used, the [Return] button in the lower - When RU software version 1.2 or later is used, the [Return] button in the lower left corner of the LCD panel is hidden.
  • Page 862 MC-373 Execute “Network Check”. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU for its version update, and click on [VERSION UP]. Click on [OK]. Check “RU VERSION”, and click on [OK]. u NOTE u In the case of “NO GOOD” indication {Troubleshooting} Turn OFF the power of the RU.
  • Page 863 MC-374 l When the version of the RU software installed in the flash ROM on the IMG Confirm the installation precautions. board is 1.4 or later CAUTIONS - While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of the RU. If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted.
  • Page 864 MC-375 When writing from the IMG17A/B board to the FLASH ROM is From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU where the list of master completed, press the [Enter] key. CL’s is to be changed, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button. u NOTE u The following screen may fail to open due to an application error.
  • Page 865 MC-376 Enter “IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME”, and click on the [SET] button. Put the floppy diskette created at step 7 into the FD drive of the CL. u INSTRUCTION u From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU for its data restore, and “IP ADDRESS” and “CL NAME” should be set to the same as before board restore the “CONFIGURATION”...
  • Page 866 MC-377 Clear the backup memory. Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. Turn OFF the power of the RU. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. Turn ON the power of the RU. {MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence.
  • Page 867 MC-378 13.4 Scanner Board 13.4.1 Nothing MC-378 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 868 MC-379 BLANK PAGE MC-379 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 869 MC-380 13.4.2 SCT17B/SCT17P Board Disconnect the connectors. u NOTES u {SP:INDEX} CAUTION - With #20001 or later, to disconnect the CN4 and CN11, use its special jig. Otherwise, the connector located on the board might be damaged. When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static - When disconnecting the connector by use of the special jig, use a screwdriver's wristband to ground your body.
  • Page 870 MC-381  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the SCT17B board. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points. u NOTE u To remove the SCT17B board, tilt it out. Otherwise, the retention clips might be l The RU normally enters the READY state. damaged.
  • Page 871 MC-382 13.5 DRV17A Board Remove the DRV17A Board. {SP:INDEX} CAUTION When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. ...
  • Page 872 MC-383 13.6 DRV17B Board  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points. {SP:INDEX} CAUTION l The RU normally enters the READY state. When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body.
  • Page 873 MC-384  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the DRV17B Board. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. {MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence.
  • Page 874 MC-385 13.7 SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board Remove the SNS17B Board. {CHECK 1} {SP:INDEX} CAUTION When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. u INSTRUCTION u The combination of SNS board varies with the serial number of the machine.
  • Page 875 MC-386 13.8 SNS17A/SNS17D Board  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points. {SP:INDEX} CAUTION l The RU normally enters the READY state. When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body.
  • Page 876 MC-387  Reinstallation Procedures Remove the SNS17A Board. For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps, and check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. {MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence.
  • Page 877 Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog built on your body may cause damage to electronic parts on the board. opens, type [“C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\ Make sure to follow this procedure as there is a possibility of fire or explosion RuPCTool.exe”] and click on the [OK] button.
  • Page 878 MC-389 Clear the backup memory. Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. Turn OFF the power of the RU. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. Turn ON the power of the RU. {MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence.
  • Page 879 MC-390 14. Replacing the Fuses and Fuse  Fuse Replacement Procedures Locations CAUTIONS - When servicing any printed circuit board, be sure to wear an anti-static wristband to ground your body. If your body is not grounded, static electricity built on your body  Fuse Classification may cause damage to electronic parts on the board.
  • Page 880 MC-391 14.1 Fuse of Power Supply Unit {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the covers. - Lower front cover - Lower left-hand side cover {MC:3.1_Covers} Remove the fuse. { Fuse Replacement Procedures}  Fuse Location  Fuse Information Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number indications...
  • Page 881 MC-392 14.2 DRV17A Board Fuses  Fuse Information {SP:INDEX} Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number* indications amperage (A)  Removal Procedures B011 Remove the DRV17A board. B021 {MC:13.5_DRV17A Board} B031 Replace the fuses. B041 { Fuse Replacement Procedures} B051 ...
  • Page 882 MC-393 14.3 DRV17B Board Fuses  Fuse Information {SP:INDEX} Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number* indications amperage (A)  Removal Procedures B161 Remove the DRV17B board. B171 {MC:13.6_DRV17B Board} B181 Replace the fuses. B191 { Fuse Replacement Procedures} B201 ...
  • Page 883 MC-394 14.4 SNS17B Board Fuses  Fuse Information {SP:INDEX} Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number* indications amperage (A)  Removal Procedures A021 Remove the SNS17B board. A031 {MC:13.7_SNS17B/SNS17C/SNS17E Board} A041 Replace the fuses. A051 { Fuse Replacement Procedures} Fuse number: Number indicated in the fuse block diagram. ...
  • Page 884 MC-395 14.5 Nothing MC-395 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 885 MC-396 14.6 SCT17B Board Fuses  Fuse Information {SP:INDEX} Board Type Rated voltage Rated Fuse number* indications amperage (A)  Removal Procedures H041 Remove the SCT17B board. H011 {MC:13.4.2_SCT17B/SCT17P Board} G011 Replace the fuses. G021 { Fuse Replacement Procedures} A061 ...
  • Page 886 MC-397 14.7 INV17A Board Fuses 14.8 INV17B Board Fuses {SP:INDEX} {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures  Removal Procedures Remove the INV17A board. Remove the INV17B board. {MC:9.14_INV17A Board} {MC:9.15_INV17B Board} Replace the fuses. Replace the fuses. { Fuse Replacement Procedures} { Fuse Replacement Procedures} ...
  • Page 887 MC-398 14.9 ERS23A Board Fuses (#50001 or Later)  Reinstallation Procedures For reinstallation, reverse the removal steps. {SP:INDEX}  Removal Procedures Remove the INV26A board. {MC:9.53_INV26A Board (#50001 or later)} Replace the fuses. { Fuse Replacement Procedures}  Fuse Location ...
  • Page 888 MC-399 15. Updating Software Versions Place the RU in the Maintenance Mode. After the main screen appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right corners of the touch panel. u INSTRUCTION u REFERENCE If the OS of CL is Windows Vista, confirm the following before updating the software If your touch is accepted by the panel, a “beep”...
  • Page 889 MC-400 REFERENCE When Uninstall is completed, click on [Finish]. For steps 4 through 8, perform “Uninstall Setup PC-TOOL.” Put the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the CL. Click on [UNINSTALL]. REFERENCE For steps 9 through 15, perform “Install Setup PC-TOOL.” Click on [INSTALL].
  • Page 890 MC-401 Click on [Install]. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU for its version update, and click on [FTP]. When Install is completed, click on [Finish]. Click on [START]. MC-401 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 891 MC-402 REFERENCE Check the IP address, and click on [OK]. For steps 16 through 26, perform “Update RU Software Version.” From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU for its version update, and click on [VERSION UP]. Click on [OK]. u NOTE u In the case of “NO GOOD”...
  • Page 892 MC-403 l When the version of the RU software installed in the flash ROM on the IMG Confirm the installation precautions. board is 1.4 or later CAUTIONS - While data is being written into the FLASH ROM, never turn OFF the power of the RU. If the power of the RU is turned OFF, the program residing in the memory is corrupted, so that the RU cannot be rebooted.
  • Page 893 MC-404 When writing from the IMG17A/B board to the FLASH ROM is Check the version of the RU software, and close Setup PC-TOOL. completed, press the [Enter] key. u NOTE u The following screen may fail to open due to an application error. If the following screen does not appear on the display, wait about 10 minutes after the click of [OK] in step 20, and then press the [Enter] key.
  • Page 894 MC-405 Turn OFF the power of the RU. Turn ON the power of the RU. Check the following points. l The RU normally enters the READY state. l The results of the image/conveyance checks are normal without nonuniformity. {MC:20._Image/Conveyance Checks} l There is no error occurrence.
  • Page 895 MC-406 16. Format Adjustment Enter the reading start position (e.g., “10”) calculated at step 3. NOTES - After entering the reading start position, do not turn OFF the power of the RU. 16.1 Main Scan Format Adjustment If the RU is powered OFF, the reading start position data will not be retained. - “Input range”...
  • Page 896 MC-407 16.1.2 Main Scan Length (Freq) Adjustment Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. u NOTE u To adjust the main scan length, expose an IP to radiation while using a steel rule or other thin article. If you use a tester or other thick article, the resulting image is larger than the actual size so that the main scan length cannot be properly adjusted.
  • Page 897 MC-408 Enter the main scan length (e.g., “2.8”) calculated at step 3. Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. NOTES - After entering the main scan length, do not turn OFF the power of the RU. If the RU is powered OFF, the main scan length data will not be retained. - “Input range”...
  • Page 898 MC-409 16.1.3 Optic Setting Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. u NOTE u Only when the machine-specific data bundled with the machine is not available and you want to reset the machine to its factory default state, the following procedures should be performed.
  • Page 899 MC-410 16.2 IP Leading-Edge Adjustment (Sub- Enter the IP leading-edge position (e.g., “20”) calculated at step 3. scanning) NOTES - After entering the IP leading edge position, do not turn OFF the power of the REFERENCES RU. If the RU is powered OFF, the IP leading edge position data will not be - IP leading-edge adjustment is only effective for an IP of HR type.
  • Page 900 MC-411 Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. Using menus “TEST”, “Image Format-1” or “Image Format-2”, and “SINGLE”, read one of the IPs prepared in step 1, and generate an image output. u INSTRUCTION u Be sure to follow the instruction mentioned in “20.2 Image/Conveyance Checks” when outputting the image.
  • Page 901 MC-412 17. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for 17.1 Shading/Sensitivity Correction for IP Type IP Type ST/ST-BD ST and ST-BD u NOTES u CAUTION - The IP must be read for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 minutes after the X-ray When correction is to be made by using the IP type ST-BD in the CR-IR363, exposure.
  • Page 902 MC-413 Using MUTL of the maintenance mode on the CR console, perform the Read the IP exposed in step 2 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 shading/sensitivity correction. minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or “image format-2”...
  • Page 903 MC-414 Supplemental explanation After the light-collecting guide is replaced, correction for optimizing optical characteristics of the light-collecting guide and sensitivity characteristics of the photomultiplier for each machine is required. Necessary correction procedures to be taken are determined according to which type of the IP the user uses and which reading mode the user uses.
  • Page 904 MC-415 17.2 Shading Speed Correction for the IP Type Set the GR (GR speed). of ST Supplemental explanation If the user employs the FR mode or the GR mode as a reading mode, shading speed correction is required. Described in this section 17.2 are the procedures for the correction.
  • Page 905 MC-416 Set the FR (FR speed). Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. Read the IP exposed in step 1 by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or “image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CR console menu, and output the image. Make sure that there is no unusual nonuniformity.
  • Page 906 MC-417 17.3 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type ST and Take the following procedures by the use of MUTL of the maintenance mode on the CR console. ST-BD Prepare for the sensitivity correction. INSTRUCTION Supplemental explanation Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of When only sensitivity correction is to be done without shading correction, follow the sensitivity adjustment.
  • Page 907 MC-418 Make sure that “RESULT-OK” appears on screen. Back up the data so adjusted into a floppy diskette. {MC:19.1_Backing Up the Scanner Data} Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose for exposing the IP, and write it down. Expose with the tungsten X-ray tube (approx. 1 mR) for exposure even if the IP is either of type ST (one side) or type ST-BD (both side).
  • Page 908 MC-419 18. Shading/Sensitivity Correction for 18.1 Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD (Both Side) IP Type HR and HR-BD Supplemental explanation CAUTION The procedures for the correction for the user using HR-BD are described here. u NOTE u Make sure that the IP type HR-BD is correctly inserted into the HR-BD cassette before making correction using the IP type HR-BD.
  • Page 909 MC-420 Perform the sensitivity correction by the use of MUTL of the Read the IP exposed in step 2 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 maintenance mode on the CR console. minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or “image format-2”...
  • Page 910 MC-421 18.2 Shading Correction for IP Type HR and HR- Read the IP exposed in step 1 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or “image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CR console menu, and output the image.
  • Page 911 MC-422 18.3 Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type 18.3.1 Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR-BD Using Tungsten X-ray Tube HR and HR-BD Using the X-ray dosimeter, measure the X-ray dose for exposing the Only when the following conditions are met, special sensitivity adjustment can be IP, and write it down.
  • Page 912 MC-423 Perform special sensitivity correction by the use of MUTL in the Read the IP exposed in step 2 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 maintenance mode on the CR console. minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or “image format-2”...
  • Page 913 MC-424 18.3.2 Special Sensitivity Correction for IP Type HR Using Make preparations for correction. Molybdenum X-ray Tube INSTRUCTION Supplemental explanation Enter the value (x.xx) of the X-ray dose measured at step 1 into the field of sensitivity adjustment. Normally, the sensitivity of the photomultiplier using the HR type is automatically calculated in the machine by the use of sensitivity correction data for the ST type.
  • Page 914 MC-425 Read the IP exposed in step 2 for a one-minute period from 10 to 11 minutes after the exposure by the use of “TEST”, “image format” or “image format-2” and “SINGLE” in the CR console menu, and output the image. INSTRUCTION Be sure to follow the instruction mentioned in “20.2 Image/Conveyance Checks”...
  • Page 915 From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU for its data backup, and Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows. When the dialog back up the “CONFIGURATION” and “SCN ALL DATA” data. opens, type [“C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\ RuPCTool.exe”] and click on the [OK] button. REFERENCE For details on the backup procedure, see under “23.
  • Page 916 MC-427 19.2 Checking the Image u INSTRUCTION u For IP type HR-BD, when the image menu is to be registered, the HQ flag should On the examination reception screen of the CL, click on the [Add be set in “Detailed Exposure Menu Parameters Setting”. Exposure Menu] button.
  • Page 917 MC-428 Click on [IP#]. Enter the barcode of the cassette to be used. Press the [ENTER] key. → The examination reservation is completed, and the following screen appears. Insert the cassette with the barcode entered. → The IP reading starts, and the image is displayed on the CL. Check the image displayed.
  • Page 918 MC-429 20. Image/Conveyance Checks Perform IP exposures. INSTRUCTIONS The following checks are made in this section. - Expose two IPs of maximum sizes for each of the IP types (ST/HR type, ST-BD - Conveyance checks type and HR-BD type) used at the institution, with the following doses. - Image checks - With the X-ray tube, the first IP should be exposed in a normal orientation, and the second in a 180-degree upside-down orientation.
  • Page 919 MC-430 20.2 Image/Conveyance Checks l For "HR-BD" IP - X-ray tube: Molybdenum X-ray tube u NOTE u - Exposure X-ray dose: 20 mR - Maximum size: IP of 18"x24" HR-BD or 24"x30" HR-BD size Because the "MENU" and so forth differ depending on the IP type, image checks - Reference conditions: Distance 0.55 m should be performed with the "MENU"...
  • Page 920 MC-431 Verify that there is no "unusual nonuniformity" found on the output Check the image format. film or on the image displayed on the image monitor. Make sure that the white blank portion is 2 mm or less, as actually measured on the IP, from the outermost edge of the image frame of the film outputted. CHECK CHECK There should be no uneven density difference in the main scan direction. The white blank portion should be 2 mm or less.
  • Page 921 MC-432 21. List of Jigs and Tools 21.1 Jigs and Tools Name Code No. Manufacturer Model No. Loop cable 898Y0981 FUJIFILM Corporation Clip clamping tool Y22S0115 Kyoto Tool (KTC) AP20-6 Special bit Y22S0114 Chapman CMB54 MC-432 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 922 MC-433 22. Installing the RU Software Touch the [Adjust Touch Point] button. When the HDD of the CL is replaced or initialized, it is necessary to install the RU software. The procedures for installing the RU software are described below. u NOTE u If the RU software is installed, except in the installation procedures during placement Touch the four [x] positions displayed on the LCD.
  • Page 923 MC-434 Touch any area on the LCD at several positions. Make sure that the "x" mark appears at the position touched. u NOTE u If the "x" mark is misaligned from the touched position, repeat steps 2 through 5 all over again. Touch the [Return] button.
  • Page 924 MC-435 23. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure This section describes the procedures for backing up and restoring the CONFIGURATION information and error log data. 23.1 Backup Procedure The following seven items of data can be backed up: - ERROR LOG - CONFIGURATION - TRACE LOG - HISTORY LOG - SCN ALL DATA - SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA...
  • Page 925 MC-436 23.1.1 Backup Procedure for RU PC-TOOL Version 2.3 or Select a data backup destination. Later u NOTE u To back up data to a floppy disk, insert a formatted floppy disk into the CL before CAUTION selecting a backup destination. If no floppy disk is set in its position, you cannot Never use the machine-specific data floppy diskette for backup.
  • Page 926 MC-437 23.1.2 Backup Procedure for RU PC-TOOL Version 2.2 or Put a formatted fl oppy diskette into the CL, and click on the [OK] but- Put a formatted floppy diskette into the CL, and click on the [OK] but- ton. Earlier CAUTION Never use the machine-specific data floppy diskette for backup. If that floppy diskette is used, the factory default machine-specific data is lost. From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to be backed up. →...
  • Page 927 MC-438 23.2 Restore Procedure The following seven items of data can be restore: - CONFIGURATION - HISTORY LOG - SCN ALL DATA - SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA (FRONT ONLY) - SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA (REAR ONLY) - SCN OPTICAL DATA CAUTION - SCN ALL DATA - SCN LIGHT COLLECTING DATA (FRONT ONLY)
  • Page 928 MC-439 23.2.1 Restore Procedure for RU PC-TOOL Version 2.3 or Select a location of the data to be restored. Later u NOTE u To restore data from a floppy disk, insert the floppy disk, which stores the data to From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to be restored. be restored, into the CL before selecting a data location.
  • Page 929 MC-440 23.2.2 Restore Procedure for RU PC-TOOL Version 2.2 or Earlier From “LIST OF EXISTING RU”, select a RU to be restored. From the RESTORE pull-down menu, select an item to be restored. Click on the [EXECUTE] button. → A dialog box appears to prompt you to insert the floppy diskette that contains the data to be resorted.
  • Page 930 MC-441 BLANK PAGE MC-441 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 931 MC-442 BLANK PAGE MC-442 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 932 MC-443 BLANK PAGE MC-443 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-11E 06.29.2012 FM6046...
  • Page 933 Control Sheet Revision Pages affected Issue date Reason number 08.25.2003 New release (FM4098) All pages 10.10.2003 Corrections (FM4160) 32, 33, 74 02.20.2004 Corrections (FM4181) 3-6, 8-15, 17, 19, 19.1, 19.2, 20, 21, 24, 25, 27, 28, 31, 34-36, 38-47, 53-56, CR-IR 363 Service Manual 56.1, 56.2, 57-69, 81, 85, 93, 99, 101, 106, 108, 115, 117, 119-123...
  • Page 934 MU-1 Overview of RU Service Utility The RU Service Utility consists of User Utility, Machine Maintenance, RU PC-TOOL, and MUTL. User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by the end user as well, while Machine Maintenance, RU PC-TOOL, and MUTL offer maintenance tools used exclusively by service engineers.
  • Page 935 MU-2 User Utility n Overview of Functions The overview of the User Utility functions is presented below. The User Utility provides a maintenance tool used by both the end user and service l Master CL Setting engineer. This chapter describes functions and operating procedures for "Master CL Setting", which is important for servicing procedures.
  • Page 936 MU-3 Starting and Exiting the User Utility Master CL Setting The procedures for starting and exiting the User Utility are described below. During installation or from the CL's that have been registered by RU PC-TOOL, set the CL to be used as a master CL. 2.2.1 Starting the User Utility n Function...
  • Page 937 MU-4 Machine Maintenance Tree of Machine Maintenance n Tree Diagram of Machine Maintenance It offers a maintenance tool used exclusively by the service engineer. Setting of RU's IP address and checking of network connection from the RU side, Machine Maintenance among others, are operated on the LCD panel of the RU.
  • Page 938 MU-5 Starting and Exiting the Machine When the MODEL name appears, sequentially touch the upper left and upper right corners of the LCD panel. Maintenance u INSTRUCTION u You can start/exit the Machine Maintenance in two different manners. If the Machine Maintenance does not start, turn OFF the power of the RU and then REFERENCE repeat steps 1 and 2 all over again.
  • Page 939 MU-6 3.2.2 Starting the Machine Maintenance in READY State 3.2.3 Exiting the Machine Maintenance Touch the utility button, and then sequentially touch the upper left and n When the [Return] Button Is Not Displayed in the Lower Left upper right corners of the LCD panel. Corner of the LCD Panel Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON.
  • Page 940 MU-7 3.2.4 Starting the Machine Maintenance when Error Occurred Sequentially touch the upper left and upper right corners of the LCD panel where "System Down" is displayed. MU-7 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-01 08.25.2003 FM4098...
  • Page 941 MU-8 Details of Machine Maintenance Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits. The Machine Maintenance offers a maintenance tool used by the service engineer for servicing.
  • Page 942 MU-9 3.3.2 FTP Server Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits. Used to set the IP address of the FTP server. n Function Set the IP address of the FTP server that contains HISTORY.LOG, ERROR.LOG, and configuration information, among others, into the flash memory on the IMG17A/B board of the RU.
  • Page 943 MU-10 3.3.3 Default Gateway Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits. Used to set the IP address of the gateway when network connection is established via the gateway.
  • Page 944 MU-11 3.3.4 Subnet Mask Touch the [BS] key to delete digits (numerals) to the one to be modified, and touch the ten-key pad to enter desired digits. Used to set the mask address of the subnet. n Function Set the mask address of the subnet into the flash memory on the IMG17A/B board of the RU. REFERENCES - Upon touching the [OK] button, the setting that has been made becomes effective.
  • Page 945 MU-12 3.3.5 Secure Host Touch the [OK] button. Used to set the IP address when you want to restrict the IP address that can be connected to the RU via telnet. If it is set to 0.0.0.0, connection can be established regardless of the IP address. n Function Exit the Machine Maintenance.
  • Page 946 MU-13 3.3.6 Secure Net Touch the [OK] button. Used to set the network address when you want to restrict the network address that can be connected to the RU via telnet. If it is set to 0.0.0.0, connection can be established from any network. n Function Exit the Machine Maintenance.
  • Page 947 MU-14 3.3.7 Network Check Touch the [Check] button. Used to check, from the RU, the network connection with the FTP server and gateway. n Function Issue PING command from the RU to the PC that is used as the FTP server and to the gateway to check the network connection.
  • Page 948 MU-15 3.3.8 Loop back Test For the CR-IR 362, the loopback test is to be conducted at the following three locations. n Function l Immediately before the hub While the loopback cable (jig: 898Y0981) is connected to the network cable or connector, the signal transmitted from the RU can be looped back by the jig to check whether the transmitted signal returns.
  • Page 949 MU-16 3.3.9 Adjust Touch Point Execute "Touch Point Check". Used to adjust the touch position of the touch panel. {MU:3.3.10_Touch Point Check} Exit the Machine Maintenance. n Function {MU:3.2.3_Exiting the Machine Maintenance} Adjust the touch position of the touch panel. n Procedures: Example where the touch position of the touch panel is adjusted Start the Machine Maintenance.
  • Page 950 MU-17 3.3.10 Touch Point Check Used to check the touch position of the touch panel. n Function Check the touch position of the touch panel. n Procedures: Example where the touch position of the touch panel is checked Start the Machine Maintenance. {MU:3.2_Starting and Exiting the Machine Maintenance} Touch the [Touch Point Check] button.
  • Page 951 MU-18 3.3.11 HV ON/OFF n Function Turn ON or OFF the HV switch (software switch). REFERENCE If the high-voltage switch of the SCN17A/SCT17B is set to OFF, the HV switch (software switch) cannot be set to ON (although its button is selectable). n Procedures: Example where the HV switch (software switch) is turned OFF Start the Machine Maintenance.
  • Page 952 MU-19 RU PC-TOOL n Tree of RU PC-TOOL RU PC-TOOL EACH RU SETTING EACH RU SETTING Functions of RU PC-TOOL CONNECTION TEST RU PC-TOOL offers a maintenance tool designed exclusively for the service engineer. {MU:4.3.1_RU NAME/RU IP ADDR} Operations, such as installing the RU software and checking connection from the CL to RU, are performed on the CL connected to the RU via the network.
  • Page 953 MU-20 4.1.2 “Maintenance is in progress” Message Display by the The following commands are used to change the contents of the flash memory: - MUTL - INSTALL LCD Panel - VERSION UP - EDIT CONFIGURATION To indicate that a maintenance is being performed on the RU, the LCD panel reads - EDIT CL NAME - RESTORE “Maintenance is in progress”.
  • Page 954 MU-21 4.1.3 RU PC-TOOL Error Screen Display n Conditions Under Which the Error Screen Opens A command for changing the contents of the flash memory is executed while the RU is running during the use of RU software version 1.2 or later and RU PC-TOOL version 2.2 or later. REFERENCE The RU is running in the following states: - The RU is being initialized.
  • Page 955 Press the [Windows] key to open the Start menu of Windows. Select [Run...] from the Start menu of Windows.When the dialog Power OFF the RU. opens, type [“C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\FCR\TOOL\RuPcTool\RuPCTo ol.exe”] and click on the [OK] button. MU-22 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-04 11.15.2004 FM4425...
  • Page 956 MU-23 Details of RU PC-TOOL 4.3.2 LIST OF EXISTING RU n Function 4.3.1 RU NAME/RU IP ADDR Display the list of RU's that have their folders in the FTP server. n Function Note that if nothing is displayed in the "RU TYPE" field, it means that its corresponding RU has not been installed normally. Display the RU name for the RU selected in "LIST OF EXISTING RU" and the IP u INSTRUCTION u address of the RU.
  • Page 957 MU-24 4.3.3 4.3.5 MUTL Used to start MUTL of the RU. n Function n Function Cancel the selected state of "LIST OF EXISTING RU" and clear the values for "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR" to enable them to be registered anew. Start MUTL for the RU selected in "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
  • Page 958 MU-25 4.3.6 PING Check the result of PING, and click on to close the window. Used to execute the "PING" command from the CL to the RU to check whether the network is connected. n Function Execute PING to the device having the IP address displayed in "RU IP ADDR". REFERENCES - If a network device of the IP address specified is found over the network to which the CL is connected, the result of execution is OK.
  • Page 959 MU-26 4.3.7 l I/O name The I/O name is displayed. Used to display the status when the sensor of the RU changes its status. Symbol Name n Function SA1, 7, 13, 19 Cassette ejection sensor Display the status when the I/O of the RU changes its status. SA2, 8, 14, 20 Cassette IN sensor In addition to "OPEN"...
  • Page 960 MU-27 l Status n Procedures Either of OPEN, CLOSE, ON, OFF, or READ is displayed. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU. l Other information Barcode information is displayed when the barcode is read. l Status changed time The time when the I/O status has changed is displayed. n Operation of Monitor Window Click on the [MON] button.
  • Page 961 MU-28 4.3.8 Used to access the FTP server from the CL and RU, respectively, to verify that the FTP server is operating. n Function On the CL, execute the command to access the FTP server to check whether the service of the FTP server is running. Additionally, execute the RU software in a remote fashion to access the FTP server from the RU and check whether the service of the FTP server is running.
  • Page 962 MU-29 4.3.9 INSTALL u NOTES u - Never turn OFF the RU power during installation. If you turn OFF the RU power Used to install the RU software to the RU selected from "LIST OF EXISTING RU" or to the RU with "RU NAME" and "RU IP ADDR" entered. during installation, the RU fails to start up because the contents of the flash ROM become damaged.
  • Page 963 MU-30 4.3.10 VERSION UP u NOTES u - Never turn OFF the RU power during a version update. If any other operation is Used to execute RU software version updates to the RU selected in "LIST OF EXISTING RU". performed during version update, the contents of the flash ROM will be corrupted, so that the RU will no longer boot up.
  • Page 964 MU-31 4.3.11 EDIT HISTORY n Detail on TOTAL PROCESSING COUNTER Used to view the HISTORY information of the RU and clear its value. Information, such as the number of IPs processed by the RU and lighting time of the erasure lamp, is displayed. When units are replaced, their information may be reset.
  • Page 965 MU-32 n Detail on LASER n Detail on ERASURE LAMP l “RESET” Each item in "LASER" is cleared. l “SINCE” When the "RESET" button is clicked, the system date is entered. A specific date may be entered manually. l “RESET” l “TOTAL TIME FOR THE LASER ON” Each item in "ERASURE LAMP"...
  • Page 966 MU-33 n Detail on PUMP n Detail on THE ERASURE LAMP CLEANING l “SHELF” (1-4) l “RESET” When it si clicked, the value of "SHELF"(1-4) is cleared. Each item in "THE ERASUER LAMP CLEANING" is cleared. l “RESET” l “SINCE” The value of the corresponding shelf is cleared.
  • Page 967 MU-34 4.3.12 EDIT CONFIGURATION n Function Used to edit the configuration information for the RU. l Identification code of the RU However, the configuration information (such as IP address of the RU) that is set in Machine Maintenance cannot be set with EDIT CONFIGURATION. When multiple units of the RU are used, an identification code (one alphanumeric digit) is set to allow the user to confirm, on the film, the RU that has performed image Some of the RU configuration information is written into the FTP server, as well as into the flash ROM of the RU. reading. l Erasure mode n EDIT CONFIGURATION Screen An erasure mode that is selectable by the erasure mode SW of the RU is set. u NOTE u Example) When “ERASE1, ERASE2”...
  • Page 968 MU-35 l Setting for warm-up function and dummy cassette detection function l Alarm setting for pump life (only for units for use in Japan) Set the timing to display alarm for pump life. - “NO DISP” (default): The alarm will not be displayed. Sets whether or not the warm-up function and the dummy cassette detection function are used when the machine is started.
  • Page 969 MU-36 4.3.13 EDIT CL NAME l Procedures for editing/adding the CL as image transfer destination Used to edit/add the CL as an image transfer destination, and edit the list of master From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of CL's as CL's.
  • Page 970 MU-37 n Editing the List of Master CL's l Procedures for editing the list of master CL's From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU where the list of master l Overview CL's is to be edited, and click on the [EDIT CL NAME] button. Edit the list of master CL's.
  • Page 971 MU-38 4.3.14 BACKUP n Overview This function copies the configuration information and error log data from the RU to l When RU PC-TOOL version 2.3 or later is used the FTP server, and from the FTP server to a floppy diskette (FD). You can select a backup location (by specifying the drive and directory) after an item n Backup Items for backup is chosen. Note that drives and directories recognized by the CL are selectable.
  • Page 972 MU-39 4.3.15 RESTORE n Procedures for BACKUP This function installs the configuration information and machine-specific data from For details on the backup procedure, see under “23. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure” the floppy diskette (FD) into the RU-specific data area of the FTP server and copies it in the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume. from the FTP server to the flash ROM of the RU. {MC:23._BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure} REFERENCE n Errors That May Occur during BACKUP and Their Probable The contents copied into the flash ROM become effective when the RU is reset.
  • Page 973 MU-40 n Overview n Procedures for RESTORE For details on the restore procedure, see under “23. BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure” l When RU PC-TOOL version 2.3 or later is used in the Checks, Replacement and Adjustment volume. You can select a location in which the data to be restored exists (by specifying {MC:23._BACKUP/RESTORE Procedure} the drive and directory) after an item for restore is chosen.
  • Page 974 MU-41 4.3.16 I/O TRACE EXPERT l 4 I/O name display text box The I/O name is displayed. This function displays the I/O trace data in the form of phase chart or timing chart. Note, however, that only I/O trace data may be displayed but communication-related l 5 Chart display area trace data cannot be displayed.
  • Page 975 MU-42 4.3.17 ERROR DB Item name Function Used to check the error names and occurrence conditions by referring to the error log “SELECT” button A error log file to be viewed is selected. data of the RU. Memos may be appended to error messages, or detailed information or analysis flows may be viewed. Of the error log files, only FATAL errors are “FATAL"...
  • Page 976 MU-43 n Procedures: Example where the latest error log is displayed Click on the [ERROR DB] button. From "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select a RU. Click on the [ERROR DB] button. Click on the [UPDATE] button. Click on the button. MU-43 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E...
  • Page 977 - Be sure to perform INSTALL after UNINSTALL is executed. n Uninstalling the RU software When the RU software is uninstalled, the contents in the “C:\ProgramFiles\FujiFilm\FC R” directory on the CL are deleted. → Note the displayed DOS prompt window to verify a 100% success.
  • Page 978 MU-45 Select the device type to be uninstalled, and click on the [OK] button. → Uninstall is performed. Click on the [OK] button. → The RU PC-MUTL window appears back on screen. MU-45 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 979 MU-46 4.3.19 VERSION UP: ALL RUs n Procedures for VERSION UP: ALL RUs For the RU's registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU", select the device type of the RU's REFERENCE to perform collective version update. When version update is to be performed for several RU's, version update is performed u NOTES u for one RU after another in order the connected RU's are registered in "LIST OF EXISTING RU".
  • Page 980 MU-47 Put the Ver.up CD-ROM into the CL, and click on the [OK] button. Click on the [OK] button. → A dialog box appears, prompting you to confirm the type of the RU to be updated → The version update of the RU software starts. and its software version. During that time, all the panel indicators on the first RU are lit, with an audible alarm Select "RU TYPE" and "RU VERSION", and click on the [OK] button. generated.
  • Page 981 MU-48 4.4 Configuration 4.4.2 CDPath The RU software should normally be installed from its Install CD. If a folder that completely copies the Install CD data resides in the hard disk, you may 4.4.1 FTP SERV install the RU software from that hard disk without using the Install CD by specifying The FTP servers of multiple RU's may be administered collectively.
  • Page 982 MU-49 n Procedures for Canceling "CDPath" Click on the [...] button. Start the RU PC-TOOL. {MU:4.2.1_Starting RU PC-TOOL} From the RU PC-TOOL menus, select [Configuration] - [CDPath]. Click on the [CLEAR] button. Click on the folder where the Install CD data has been completely copied, and leave that folder open.
  • Page 983 MU-50 Operation 4.5.1 Initialize APL Effects RU application initialization. u NOTE u Effect RU application initialization only when no error code is detectable and processing freezes during troubleshooting. For the procedure for RU application initialization, see “20.4 Procedures for Restoring the RU Application”...
  • Page 984 MU-51 MUTL (Maintenance Utility) Functions The MUTL, which offers a utility used by service engineers, is operated from the RU {MU:5.3 [3]_Software Check} PC-TOOL on the CL. Conventional CI (Character Interface) has been changed to GUI (Graphical User {MU:5.3 [3-1]_Backup Memory Clear (CPU Board)} Interface), thereby providing substantially improved usability.
  • Page 985 MU-52 {MU:5.3 [6]_Mechanical 1 Check} {MU:5.3 [5]_Scanner Check} {MU:5.3 [6-1]_IP Removal Unit} {MU:5.3 [5-1]_Diagnostic} {MU:5.3 [6-1-1]_Suction Cup Arm HP} {MU:5.3 [5-2]_Polygon Motor} {MU:5.3 [5-3]_Laser} {MU:5.3 [6-1-2]_IP Removal (F/L)} {MU:5.3 [5-4]_HV Diagnostic} {MU:5.3 [6-1-3]_IP Removal Step Operation} {MU:5.3 [5-5]_Format Adjustment} {MU:5.3 [6-1-4]_Clutch} {MU:5.3 [6-1-5]_Pump}...
  • Page 986 MU-53 {MU:5.3 [6-4]_Side-Positioning Conveyor 2} {MU:5.3 [7]_Mechanical 2 Check} {MU:5.3 [6-4-1]_Cleaning Guide HP (MC4)} {MU:5.3 [7-1]_Post-Reading Conveyor} {MU:5.3 [6-4-2]_Cleaning Guide Position Movement (MC4)} {MU:5.3 [6-4-3]_Cleaning Guide Diagnostic} {MU:5.3 [7-1-1]_Grip Release HP (MD1)} {MU:5.3 [6-4-4]_Side-Positioning (BCRC1)} {MU:5.3 [7-1-2]_Grip Position Movement (MD2)} {MU:5.3 [7-1-3]_Post-Conveyance Grip Diagnostic} {MU:5.3...
  • Page 987 MU-54 {MU:5.3 [7-3]_Erasure Conveyor 2} {MU:5.3 [7-3-1]_Path Change Guide (SOLF1)} {MU:5.3 [7-3-2]_FANE2 (INV)} {MU:5.3 [7-3-3]_FANE3(LAMP)} {MU:5.3 [7-3-4]_Erasure Conveyor (ME1)} {MU:5.3 [7-3-5]_LAMP (LAMP1-5)} {MU:5.3 [7-3-6]_Erasure Unit Thermal Sensor Display} {MU:5.3 {MU:5.3 [7-4]_Control Unit} [7-4]_Control Unit} {MU:5.3 {MU:5.3 [7-4-1]_FAN (G1 to G5)} [7-4-1]_FAN (G1 to G5)} {MU:5.3 [7-5]_Sub-Scanning Unit}...
  • Page 988 MU-55 Starting and Exiting the MUTL 5.2.2 Exiting the MUTL u NOTE u 5.2.1 Starting the MUTL Before exiting the MUTL, check to ensure that the operation that was performed in MUTL has been completed. CAUTION If the operation that was performed in MUTL is under way, the operation running on Do not start multiple MUTL's for a single RU.
  • Page 989 MU-56 Details of MUTL [1-2] Processing Mode Setting l READ: Read Conveyance Check Performs a normal read operation. This menu should not be used for servicing purposes. [1-1] Conveyance Setting l 1-ERASE: Primary Erasure l AUTO MODE IP reading is performed to detect the dose of the IP, and IP erasure is performed according to the detected dose.
  • Page 990 MU-57 [1-3] Number of Conveyance Setting Insert the cassette with the barcode entered. The number of conveyance may be set in a range from 1 to 99999. Erasure conveyance starts, and the result is displayed on the MUTL. To halt the conveyance while the IP is conveyed with the number of conveyance set to greater than 1, set "0 (zero)"...
  • Page 991 MU-58 Board Check n Procedures for Halting in the Middle of Conveyance u NOTE u Set to half the conveyance. Once the board check is initiated, the ongoing process cannot be interrupted. Even when the MUTL is exited, the board check running on the RU remains intact. To interrupt the board check, turn OFF the power of the RU.
  • Page 992 MU-59 [2-1] All Board Set the number of checks. The entire diagnostics for the electrical subsystems are repeated for the number specified. The boards to be diagnosed are as follows. - CPU Board - IMG Board - SCN/SCT Board The IMG board and SNS/DRV board are checked in sequence. - SNS/DRV Board When the checks are completed, the number of checks that has been set REFERENCE...
  • Page 993 MU-60 [2-3] IMG Board [2-5] SNS/DRV Board The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified. The following diagnostics are repeated for the number specified. - Battery, backup, and memory read/write test - Sensor change associated with turn-ON/OFF of the solenoid - FIFO read/write test - Communication between pulse motor and FPMC - LED register read/write test REFERENCE - Communication with BCR If the diagnostic results of the board check are normal when the number of checks is...
  • Page 994 MU-61 [2-7] CPU Board Setting Display Displays the DipSW1 setting for the CPU91A board. The display content and setup meaning are presented below. MU-61 CR-IR 363 Service Manual 011-202-08E 09.30.2009 FM5540...
  • Page 995 MU-62 Software Check [3-2] Ver. Display (FLASH) //This function is not available for the software versions of V3.6 or earlier. To be [3-1] Backup Memory Clear (CPU Board) available in the future.// [3-3] Ver. Display (FTP SERV) n Function //This function is not available for the software versions of V3.6 or earlier. To be Clear the backup memory of the RU.
  • Page 996 MU-63 [3-4] MAC Address Display [3-5] VERSION UP Displays the CL’s MAC address. //This function is not available for the software versions of V3.6 or earlier. To be available in the future.// [3-5-1] Main CPU IPL Ver. Up //This function is not available for the software versions of V3.6 or earlier. To be available in the future.// [3-5-2] Sub CPU IPL Ver.
  • Page 997 MU-64 Virtual Image Check [4-2] Virtual Image Test Image reading is performed virtually, thereby enabling a cause of image abnormality n Function to be located. Generate and output test images with each of the components comprising the scanner [4-1] CORRECTION ST/HR unit, by, for example, generating and outputting image data with the boards, or turning ON the LED of the PMT board and inputting the resulting light; accordingly, a location n Function...
  • Page 998 MU-65 n Procedures: Example of IMG Board Pattern Output Click on [Start Examination]. Start the MUTL. {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} Touch the RU LCD panel on the upper left and upper right in order named, to enter the reading mode during maintenance. REFERENCE Click on [IP#].
  • Page 999 MU-66 Select Virtual Image Test. Turn OFF the power of the RU and back ON. Exit the MUTL. {MU:5.2.2_Exiting the MUTL} Click on the [IMG Board Pattern Output] button. REFERENCE The image is outputted about one minute after the [IMG Board Pattern Output] button is clicked.
  • Page 1000 MU-67 [4-2-2] IMG Board Frame Memory Re-Output n Procedures: Example of IMG Board Frame Memory Re-Output n Function Start the MUTL. {MU:5.2.1_Starting the MUTL} Performing a read operation causes the IP image data to be stored in the IMG board frame memory.

This manual is also suitable for:

Clearview csClearview csmCr-ir 363

Table of Contents

Save PDF